50%(2)50% found this document useful (2 votes) 3K views239 pagesMetrology-Quality-Control Textbook PDF
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content,
claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF or read online on Scribd
Directorate Of Distance Education
Janardans Rai Nager
Rajasthan Vidyapeeth (Deemed) University
Pratap Nagar,Udaipur-313001, Rajasthan
www. [Link]
Cgc Chansnwelion
sacle
AVGS Inatituie of Enginsering & Techactogy
Nigeea, Sectors Waks
MVP. Gclony. VISAKHAPATHAM-17
METROLOGY
&
QUALITY CONTROL
In Technical Collaboration With
Sandip Academy
Kotestnwar Plaza, Nehru Road, Mulund (wh, Mumbai, Maharashtra, India, Pin-400080
‘e-Mail: sandipacademy@yahoo com, website: wmw-sandipacademy com
—18.
19.
CSC: CHAKRAVARTHI
Assistant Manager - GAC
CONTENTS
PART-I ; METROLOGY
Limits, Fits and Gaug:
Angular Measurements ..
Screw Thread Measurement ....
Comparators...
Surface Finish Measurements
Machine Tool Testing Techniques
Gear Measurement ..
PART-II : QUALITY CONTROL
110. Quality, Function
j 11. Quality Assurance...
(12. Quality Economics
| 13. Quality Organisation...
114, Statistical Quality Control (S.Q.C.)
4
LL - 1.12
21-219
3.1 - 3.18
41+ 4.13
seine SAL + 5.1L
10.1 - 10,14
111-118
woe 12.1 - 12.5
13.1 - 15.18
T4,1 14.54INTHAVAAMAHD 929.
SDYAO -19psnsM instoicem
SYLLABUS
Metrology (Marks ; 04, Periods : 04):
Introduction, Scope, Need of Inspection, Concept of mass production, Interchangeability
& selesiveassenbly, Concept of precision accuracy, sestviy, ampBfcation, magnification
Error- Sources of Errors 4
‘Measurement (Marks : 06, Periods : 06)'
Principles of measurement, SI of measurements in dial standard, intemational standard |
line std, end std wave lenethstd, ‘measurement concept principles, Construction & |
working of simple instfamént lige steel tule & vernier calipers surface, plate, angle plate
radius /feeler /pitch screw gauge, Micrometers slip gauges end bars ,length bars, V bloc!
‘Concept of calibration- Construct ion & Working of calibration Tester 1
Limits, Fits.& Gauges (Marks : 08, Periods : 06)
Definition terminology, Taylor’s principe, Design of plug, ring & snap gauges Simple gauges |
15 919-1963 (limits, fits & Tolerances) Relation gauges, ISO system of limit and fits, plaid
plug gauge 18 3484-1966, plain ring gauge IS 3485-1972, Snap Gauge IS 3477- 1973
|. Angular Measurements (Marks : 05, Periods : 04)i4
Construction & working of universal bevel protractor. Spirit level, Sinebar, sine centre, if
Angle Gauges, Angle Dekkor, Autocollimaters. i
. Screw Thread measurement (Marks : 06, Periods : 06)
‘Terminology of screw thread, Measurement of Different elements : Major Diameter, Mind
Diameter; Effective Diameter, Pitch; Thread Angle, Construction & working of following
instrumentsto measureabove parameters: Floating carriage micrometer; Tool maker's
microscope; Optical profil projector, Pitch measuring machine; Screw thread micromeel
‘Tangent micrometer.
Comparators (Marks : 10, Periods : 08
Principles of operation of various types of comparator like mechihical , electrical, optical
pneumatic solex gauge low-pressure & high pressure (Trial type working mechanism) typ
Characteristic of good comparator. Relative advantages & disadvantages of various
types of comparator, Study of cial indicator types, construction & working details.Surface Finish (Marks.: 05, Periods 06)
Importance of surface finish for various types of applications, Concept of primary texture &
secondary texture (Roughness & waviness), Terminology as per IS, Direction of Lay, CL.
A,[Link] Actual specimen fiifferent machine components. E. g, Grinding, lapping ,
milling ,shaping ,broaching, Principles of operation of stylus probe type of instruments
‘Tomlinson’s surface meter. Taylor Robson, Talysurf. Various Techniques of qualitative
analysis,
Machine tool Testing Techniques (Marks :.10, Periods : 08)
Testing techniques : Parallelism -parallelism Testing between two planes one plane One
stationary other moving exis of rotation and trajectory, Flatness testing by straightness testing.
techniques & by optical fats, Squareness Testing -by dial indicator optical square, Indicating
method, Straightness testing by straight edge spirit level & autocollimators, Machine tool
testing alignment test tobe carried out with lathe, driling, milling machine.
Gear Measurement (Marks : 06, Periods : 06)
‘Terminology, Measurement ofindividual elements by diferent suitable instrument,,gear tooth
vernier tooth profile projector, Parkinson gear tester, Errors backlash, runout
Quality Function (Marks : 06, Periods : 04)
‘Meaning of Quality control, Quality objective, Quality policies, quality specifications,
Inspection - concept, need , planning, Difference between Quality control and inspection.
Difference between Quality of Design , Quality of confirmation & Quality of performance,
Concept of Reliability & maintainability.
. Quality Assurance (Marks : 04, Periods : 04)
Concept, Quality mindedness, Quality audit, vendor quality rating capability, Quality .
circles- concept purpose and function.
Quality Economics (Marts : 04, Periods : 04)
Cost of quality, Value of quality balance between the two, Economics of quality of design
and quay animation, Cost quali control apprise prevention, enteral endinera
frilurecest.)
Quality Organisation (Marks : 10, Periods : 12)
Organisation for quality, Quality policies, Quality systems, concept of total quality management
TSO [Link] & its evaluation & implication, Machine capability & studies, National
& international codes.14, Statistica! Quality Control (SQC) (Marks : 10, Periods : 12)
‘Meaning & importance of SQC Defiition and interpretation of frequency distribution jmean,
mode, median, standard deviation, range ,variance ;variable measurement & attribute
measurement, Construction of frequency distribution curve, frequency histogram frequency
polygon, frequency curve, Normal distribution curve, area under the curve & its interpretation.
Control charts for variables -X &R chart, Control charts for attributes-P chart & C chart.
Process capability of machine concept determination of statistical limits & comparison with
‘tolerance limits to determine capable or incapable process, Acceptance sampling. Concept,
‘comparison with 100% inspection different types of sampling plans with merits & demerits
O.C. curve -significance & importance, producer's risk, AQL, AOQL,IQL,LTD, Product
reliability, MTBF, MTBRCSc Chameawenhfer
sae a
2 Ne oS
METROLOGYChapter... 1
METROLOGY
“Q.1. What is metrology ?
Ans : Metrology is 2 science of measurements. It is concemed with numerous problems
thedfetical as well as practical, related with the measurements, such as units of measurements
and their standards, methods of. measurement, measuring instruments, accuracy of
measurement and measuring instruments, ec, In-broad sense, metrology is not limited to
sneasurements only, but is also related with industrial inspection and its various techniques.
Inspection is concerned with checking of product at various stages during manufacture and is
cartied out with gauges, Metrology includes the design, manufacturing and testing gauges of
allkinds,
“Q,2. Enumerate the scope of metrology ?
‘Ans : Metrology is ascience of measurement, In'a broader sense metrology is not limited to
length and angle measurements but also concerned with numerous problems theoretical as
well as practicél related with measurement, such as:
i. Units of measurement and their standards, which is concerned with the establishment,
reproduction,conservation and transfer of units of measurement and their standards,
i, Methods of measurement based on agreed units afd standards,
i. Errors of measurement.”
Mesuring instruments and devices.
vy, Accuracy of measuring instruments and their care,
vit Industrial inspection and its various techniques.
vii. Design, manufacturing and testing of gauges of all kinds.
/ Q.3. What is the need of inspection in industries
Ans : Inspection isa recent development. Inspection means chetking of all materials, products
of component parts at various stages during manufacture, tis the act of comparing materials,
products or commponents with the established standards,“Metrology & Quality Control
In old days, different component parts were made by a crafisman and assembled by the
same craftsman, If the parts did not fit properly he used to make the necessary changes in
the dimensions of the parts. Thesefore, the two matinparts were not required 1o be of dimensions
of close tolerances and there was no need of inspection: But our modern industrial system is
based on intrchangeable manufacture (mass production), to reduce cost of production, Different
parts are made in large quantities in different plants and asembled in another ptant. So itis
essential that any part, chosen randomly should fit properly with any other mating part, that
100 chosen randomly. This éan be possible only when the parts are made to close dimensional
tolerances. For this the inspection of parts at the various stages of manufacturing is needed.
Inspection provides means to find out short comings and defects in manufacture and ensures
‘that the product conforms to the desired standard. It should be done not only at-thie final stage
but must start from the begining i.e. from the time of receiving the caw materials.
/ QA. Describe in short the concept of mass production in modern industrial systems,
‘Ans : Mass production isthe specialised manufacture of identical articles on a large scale.
- Since identical articles are produced the operations are repealitive, production auxiliary aids
“such'as special tools, jigs and fixtures, material handing system, inspection devices can be
used advantageously.
In mass production the machines are arranged in tine layout (according to sequence of
operations) Different parts are made in large quantities in different plants/production lines or
shops, and assembled in another plant/shop. So itis essential that any part, chosen randomly
should fit properly with any other mating parts, that too chosen randomly. to achieve this itis
necessary fo use precise specialised machines, standard materia}, builtin type material handing
equipments, conveyors etc. Theres astandardisation of parts, materials, processes, equiments
ete, The parts are prodjiced with close tolerances, In mass production line balancing plays
important tole in mainting the flow of materials as it is being converted from raw material
stage to the finished product state, In mass production prior planning and prodiction control is
comparatively easier, The cycle time is quite short and the unit cost is less as compared to
batch production,
¥Q.5. What is Interchangeability ? State its advantages 2
Ans : Inold days production was confined to small number of parts. The same worker used
to produce the parts end assemble them to obtain necessary fits. But modem trend is towards
‘mass production in which parts are made by different workers in different plants and assembled
in one shop. Under such conditions, the dimensions of the various mating parts must strictly
lie within certain variations so that any one part selected randomly will assemble correctly
with any other mating part that too chosen randomly. Such system is called interchangeable
system or system of limits and fits, -
Imterchangeability is possible only when certain standards should be followed. When all
the parts to be asserabled are manufactured in a single unit, local standards may be followed.Metrology wa
Advantages :
i. Production is increased considerably.
ii, Results in reduced production cost.
iii, Simplifies replacement and repairs of wom out or defective parts, so maintensé-cost
is very much reduced,
._ A worker is concemed with limited work, so he can easily specialise himself in that
‘work: This results in superior quality of work.
1, Assembly tim is reduced considerably, so production rate is increased.
i. Different components can be manufactured in different parts of the country, depending
‘upog the availability of raw material, skilled labour and other facilities. This reduces
cost 6f production considerably.
‘Q.6. Write short noe on- selective assembly.
Ang : In selective assembly, the parts of any one type are classified into several groups
according to size, The mating parts are also classified into same number 6f groups, so that the
corresponding groups,when assembled will give the desired fit at assembly with little or no
further machining. In this method the paris are manufactured to rather wider tolerences and
then seperated into number of groups according to their actual sizes. Assembly is then made
from the selected groups. Selective assembly results in reduced cost of production without
4 affecting the quality of the product. It is often followed in ai craft, automobile industries and
4 in ball and roller bearing industries.
Q.7.. What do you understand by measurement ?
What are the different methods of measurement ? 2
Ans : The set of experiments operations carried out to determine the value of a quantity is
called mesurement and the sequence of the operations performed is called process of
‘measurement. The various methods of measurement are as follows :
1, Method of direct mesurement : This is simple method of measurement, in which the
value of quantity to be measured is obtained directly by the, use of instruments. ¢.g.
‘measurements by using scales, vernier calipers, micrometers, bevel protractor, etc,
2. Method of indirect measurement : In this method the value of quantity to be measured
is obtained by measuring the cther quantities which are functionally related to the required
value e.g. angle measurement by sine bar, measurement of screw pitch by 3 “wire method.
3. Absolute or fundamental method : In this method the zero division of the measuring
instruments e.g. steel rule, vernier calliper, etc.
4, Contact method-of- measurement : The sensor or the measuring tip of measuring
instrument is placed in direct contact with the quantity to be measured e.g, micrometers,
vernier calipers, diat indicators, etc.
5. Contactless method of measurement : The sensor or measuring tip of instrument is
not placed in contact with the quantity to be measured e.g, measured by optical instruments.
Such as tool maker’s microscope, projection comparator etc,fs. | “Metrology & Quality Control
6. Cofaparative method of measurement : In this method the value of the quantitiy 10
be measured is compared with known value of the same quentitiy or ancther quantity
functionally related with it i.e, the deviation of the measured dimension from master gauge
are determined @.g. dial gauges or other comparators.
Q.8. Define and explain the term accuracy of measurements,
Ans : The purpose of measurement is to determine the true dimensions of a part. But no
measurement can be absolutely accurate; there is always some error and the amount of error
depends upon the various factors such as accuracy and design of measuring instruments, skill
of the operator using it, method used for measurement, temperature variations, elastic
deformation of the part of insturment, ete. Because of these numerous reasons, the true
dimension of a part can not be determined but can oily be approximated. The agreement of
the measured value with the true value of the measured quantity is called accuracy. If the |
measurement of a dimension of a part approximates very closely to the true value of that
dimension, said to be accufate. Thus the term accuracy denotes the closeness of the ‘i
measured value with the true value. The difference between these two value is the error of
measurement. The lesser the error, the more is the accuracy.
q
i
Q.9. Discuss the possible effects upon accuracy of measurement due to :
(2) Temperature variation, (2) Elastic deformation (3) Contact pressure,
Ans:
1, Temperature variationa : The standard temperature for measurement is 20°C. and gauges
are made to be of correct size when they are at this temperature. If the measurements are
carried out at temperature other than the standard temperature an error will be introduced.
Due to expansion or contraction of instrument and part are of similar metals, accuracy of
‘measurement will not be affected even if measurement is catried-out at other temperature,
because both will contract or expand by the same amount,
‘The difference between the temperatures of instrument and part will also introduce an
error in the measurement, especially when the material of the part or instrument has higher
coefficient of expansion. To avoid such etzors, instrument and the part to be measured should
be allowed to attain the same temperature before use and should te handled as little as
possible. To obtain accurate results, high grade reference gauges should be used only in
rooms where the temperature is maintained very close to the standard temperature,
2, Elastie deformation : Straight edges are used to check the straightness and flatness of
parts: They are generally supported at two points, This results
in deformation or deflegtion, the amount of which depends
upon the positions of the supports. The deflection causes an
ersor in the straightness of the working faces. To have
minimum deflection the distance should be 0.554 times the
Jenyth of the bar (Airy poinis : (S/L = 0.554)Fhich depends
es. To have
tis also important that the measuring faces of the instrument be parailel to each other i
there should not be any slope at the ends. For this the distance between the two supports
should be 0.577 times length of the bar (S/L = 0.77)
3. Contaet pressure : The variations in thé contact pressure between the anvils of instrument
and the work being measured produces considerable differences in the readings obtained and
introduce errors in the readings. The development of correct feel is one of the skills to be
acquired. Errors are caused by deformation of the instrument frame and the workpiece. The
deformation of work piece and anvils of the instrument depends upon the contact pressure
and shapes of contact surfaces. Too much contact pressure results in deformation of both the
instrument and work piece, When there is surface contant between instrument anvils and
work surface,there is very little distortion (deformation), But when there is point contact
between the surfaces the distortion is appreciable.
Q. 10, State Abbe’s alignment principle. Explain sine and gosine etrors,
Ans : Abbe’s alignment principle ;- It states that “the exis or line of measurement should
coincide with the axis of measuring instrument or line of the measuring scale.
If while measuring length of a work piece the measuring seale is inclined to the true line of
the of dimension being measured there will be an errorin the measurement.
L= measured length.
‘Leos = true length,
L (1 ~ 608 )=‘error.
* ‘The length recorded will be more than thé trie length, This error is called cosine error. In
most cases, the angle "0" is very small and the error is negligible,
‘The cosine error may occur while using dial gauge, if the axis of the pointer is not atong
the direction of movement of work. Also, when an indicator is fitted with a ball-end stylus‘Metrology & Quality Control
_form, the arm should be so set that the direction of movement of work is tangential to the are
along which the ball moves, ther wise cosine error will be introduced.
Shystn 0.
“The combined cosine and sine error occurs ifthe micrometer axis isnot truely perpendicular
to the axis of the work piece (Refer Fig. 1.4). The same error occurs while measuring the
length of an end gauge in a hérizontal comparator ifthe gauge is not supported so thet its axis
is parallel to the axis of the measuring anvils or if its ends, though parallel to each other are
not square with the ends, The erros ofthe above nature are avoided using gauges with spherical
ends. such gauges need not be alignied accurately when used in'combination,
[Link] the term “precision” as used in measurements. How it is applied in.
manufacturing a product ?
‘Ans : Itisa repeatability of a measuring process. when number of measurements are carried
out for a single quantity in identical conditions ( [Link] the same observer, With the same
instrament and in short intervals of time ) the precision determines how well these performed
measurements agree with each other.
Precision has no meaning for ‘only one measurement, but exists only when a set of
measurements is carried out for the same quantity under identical conditions. For any set of
measurements, the individual results will vary slightly from the mean or average value. The
lesser the variations in the measurement more is the precision [Link] a component
having true length of 50 mm. A person takes number of readings for the length measurement
of this componts, with the same instrumént and in short intervals of time, The readings obtained
are 49,001, 49.002, 49.00, 48.999, 48, 998 mm. Though the readings are not accurate, they
are precise because the variations in the readings above or below the mean value 49.00 mm
are very small.In mést of the titeasurementsysery often precipion is required. In fast, prosipion id thé:
main criterion by-which this atity-of the irorkeisfidgedilge:.
Modérit industrialssystem:is-based:on:interchangéable:rhanufactufe; ‘to reduce
the parts are madeto closestimens
[Link] measurement isessential..
L2CDAstlinguishy cletrtrhetmten preeotniaind Accuraeys2cy".-
crsiiv the measurement of a dirnension are very less Le. if they agree closely
éshey are said to be precise even though their mean or average value may not
the true value of that dimension. Since there is differenée between the true and.
of ho mEusured value of the dimension it can not be suid to be accurate, In otfier words, there
no aceuracy:in the measuring process, but~ptescision is more”
Similarly if the variations in themtéasurements-of a-ditnensionrare more,but theif thean:~
lue agrees very closely with the'trie-value of that dimension [Link]-said to be-accarate,
ough they are not precise, is:
Accuracy is ustially [Link] measuring proggssp but very often in-mést of the:
easurements, only precisiosrisinequired: lt rhuclveasiex and-chedper to-eehieve'pinecision
an to achieve-great accuracyuracy.
aM aRRGQ.15. What are the sources of errors in measurement? OR Explain systematic erro
and random errors .
of thé:measured dimension, Errors can broadly classified into two catagories viz, System
orcontrollable errors and random errors.
Systematic‘or Controlinble errors :- As ihe name suggests these errors are repeat
consistently with the repeatition of the measurement operation and can be controll
magnitude as well as in serie. If properly anelysed they can be determined af
reduced Systematic ercors includ : i
(|: Enlibratton errors :- These are caused du to the variation inthe calibrated scale fi
7S tsnominal value, The actual length of standards such as slip gauges and engraved scaler]
3¢._vary from the nominal value by small amoimt. This will cause an error in meastirement
sn ‘magnitude, Some times the instrument inertia and hysterisis effects do not allow
‘S"instruments to translet the measuremeni accurately. Drop in voltage along the wires off
of electric meter may induce an error (called signal transmission error) in measurement. j
Hg) can give cise to error in the measured size of a compenent, Temperature is the
significant factor which causes error in the measurement due to expangion or contractioif
‘component being measured or of instrument used for measurement,
tylus pressure (contact pressure) :- Changes in the stylus pressure produces variati
in both the deformation of work piece surface and deflection of work piece. This will ca
an error in the measurement. Variations in the force applied by the anvils of micrometer
the work to be measured result in the difference in its readings. The error is caused by
distortion of both,micrometer frame and work piece. To avoid this effect of contact press
‘micrometer is fitted with a ratchet mechanism with an operating thimble. The ratchet sl
‘when the applied pressure exceeds ihe minimum required operating pressure,
lv. Avoidable errors :- These errors may o¢cur due to parallax,non-alignment of work pi
‘centres,improper location of measuring ingtruments,etc. The error due [Link]
caused when the centre line of work piece is not normal to the céntre line of the messuq
instruments,
Random errors :¢ Random errors occur randomly and are accidental in nature. Their speg
causes, magnitudes and sense can not be determined from the knowledge of meesuring
»—-or conditions of measurement, The possible sources of such errors are:
i. Small variations in the position of setting standard and work piece.
fi. Slight displacement of lever joints of measuring instruments.[Metrotogy
iti,
satire
Operator error scale ronding =
iv, Fltgtions ine ton meas ng instrument. ft ote
Ans
Q.14, Differentiate between systematic errors random errors.
Systematic errors
These errors bre repestitive in nature
and are of constant and similar form.
‘These errors result from improper
conditions or procedure that are
consistent in action.
. Except personal error, all other
systematic errors ean be controlled
in magnitude and sense.
Te properly analysed, these errors
can be determined and reduced or
even eliminated.
. These errors include calibration errors,
errors due to variation in atmospheric
conditions, variation in contact pressure,
parallax errors, misalignment errors, etc
Wanda erfors ss
“Fite are non-consistent. The soprees
‘giving rise to such errors are random.
‘Such errors are inherent in the measu-
ring system or measuring instruments
Specific causes, magnitudes and sense
ofthese errors cannu! be determined
from the knowledge, of "vausting
system or conditions of measurement.
‘These errors can not be eliminated, but
the results obtained can be corrected.
‘These errors include errors caused
due to variation in position of setting
dard and work piece, errors, due
displacement of lever joints of instra
~ments, errors resulting from back+
lash, friction ete.
Q.15. Explain the following terms used in measurements. Repeatability,
Reproducibility sensitivity and readability, eallratien.
Ans:
1: Repeatability :- Itis the ability of mensuring system to reproduce the same results for
the measurement of same quantity when the measurements are carried out by the same
observer, with the same instrament,under the same conditions and in short intervals of time.
2. Roproducibitity : It refers 10 the [Link] of pattem of variation in measurement
[Link] of agreement between the rcsults of measurements of the same quantity when
individual measurements are caried out by different observers,by different methods using
different instruments under different concitions :
5. Sensitivity and Readability + Sensitivity and readability, both the terms ere associated
with the measuring instruments and not \sith the measuring process. Sensitivity measures the
ability of a measuring instrument to de ect small variations in a quantity being measured
Higher the abitity of such deteciton of an instrument, more sensitive itis, but ifthe iigtrumentsMetralser eQualipConnreh)
are made more sensitive they are easily affected by external effects Such as‘temperatuees:Y
variations, vibrations. etc. This affects the accuracy and precisiow’ofmedsurementalf-an
instrument is more sensitive than requirement,it becomes difficult Tor‘egeratorso obtain'asi
reliable reading,
Readability refers to the ease with which the readings of a measuring iristrimant cuz be
read. it is the susceptibility of measuring instrument to have indicatiéns éonvericd into’
‘meaningfel number. To make micrometers more readable they are provided with’ ventior scdle
Redability and hence accuracy of measvrement can also be inipraved:bycdse, ofsproper'o
magnifying devices,"
|. Calibration :-It refers to measoernents ofthe measuring isstiments 2
cole of the instrument ty arplving same etandurdiced signals, Calibratiohvis apfe-measurentent
process, generally carried out by manufacturers, Consistent use of instfimentsraffect thei
Feeney WE the accuracy is to be mainjained. the instruments-aust beselieckéd:dad!re-d More
+ SIsbitibrated. ‘[Link] of such eolibiation depend upon the [Link]énvironniercetcfbond
agp tomlin accuracy of measurement required, As fras powsibie calibration shouldbe!
pavonned under environmental conditions which are very close tétheicahditionsitinden which’
fees
fe
SX 2.16, What iy meant by magaitieation? Explain briefly. ly. Y
‘Ans : Toinprovetbe accuracy of measurement, small vation ithe guimty sing miensied}
9 ‘oa easily detected by measuring instrument and its reddings hoslshalsis! bésoasi
srladanie: For this the 9
“Tins unagoisicetion means increasing the vaagh
SS many times to make ctmore readubl
“BS Magnification ablained i -asucing instrument may be meshenichlelecirital; cleetrotsin14
optical ar orieumaic
Mechanical ov fon io obisined by means of [Link] trainsin-eietsitst
magnification, de
sin the quantity bs
Electroni¢ ma;
magnification uses principle efreflecticn na
air for amplifying ihe output of mencust
Q.17. Give a brief classification of evrors which mtay arlseduing measurement ver:
Ans : Types of errer :- During mezsureient several types oferrof may: arise, (Paeséare
1. Static errors which includes.
a Reading ervors.
', Chatacteristic errors.
¢. Environmental errors,In most of the measurements, very often precision is required. In fact, precision is the
main criterion by which the quality of the work is judged.
Moder industrial system is based on interchangeable manufacture, to reduce
production cést, Different parts ofa product are made in large quantities in different palnts
kind assembled in another plant, So itis essential that any part, chosen randomly should fit
properly with anly other mating part that too chosen randomly. This ean be possible only when °
the parts are made to close dimensional tolerances. For this accuracy is not important but
“precision in measurementis essential.
istinguish clearly between “precision and Accuracy’,
ns : Both the terms are associated with measuring process. Accuracy is the agreement of
peatability of the measuring process. It shows how well identically performed measurements
with each other, Thus accuracy is concerned with the 1&8 value, but precision has no
oncern with it, Presision has rio meaning for only one measurement,but exists only when &
‘Set of measurments is carried out for the same quantity under identical conditions.
ig1.5
Ifthe vacations in the measurement ofa dimension are very less, if they agree closely
ith each other they are said to be precise even though their miean or average value may not
ie measured value of the dimension it cait not be said 10 be accurate. In other words, there
no accuracy in the measuring process, but prescision is more,
Similarly if the variations in the measufements of a dimension are more,but their mean
lue agrees very closely with the true value of that dimension they are said to be accurate,
ough they are not precise, :
Accuracy is usually sought for in a measuring process, but very often, in most of the
easurements, only precision is required, It is much easier and cheaper to achieve precision
to achieve great accuracy,Q.13. What are the sources of errors in measurement? OR Explain systematic err;
and random errors .
Ans ;, Error in measurement is the difference between the measured value and the true val
of theimeasured dimension. Errors can broadly classified into two catagories viz. System:
orcontrollable errors and random errors,
Systematic or Controllable errors :- As the name suggests these errors are reneai
consistently with the repeatition of ihe measurement operation and can be controlled!
magnitude as well as in sense. If properly analysed they can be determined 3j
reduced Systematic errors include:
1. Calibration errors :- These are caused due to the variation in the calibrated scale
ies nominal vatue. The actual length of standards such as slip gauges and engraved scale
‘vary from the nominal value by small amount. This will cause an error in measiiremeni
‘constait magnitude, Some times the instrument inertia and hysterisis effects do not allow’
instruments to translet the measurement accurately. Drop in voltage along the wires o!
electric meter may induce sn error (called signal transmission error) in measurement,
i, Ambient or atmospheric conditions (Environmental errors) :- Variation in atmosp
condition (i.e. temperature, pressure and moisture content) at the place of measurement {rt
internationally agreed standard values (temperature ~20-degree C and pressure = 760
Hg) can give rise to error in the measured size of a compenent, Temperature is the
significant factor which causes error in the measurement due to expansion or contraction
‘component being measured or of instrument used for measurement,
{ii Stytus pressure (contact pressure) :- Changes in the stylus pressure produces variati
in both the deformation of work piece surface and deflection of work piece. This will
‘an error in the measurement. Variations in the force applied by the anvils of micrometer
the work to be measured result in the difference in its readings. The error is caused by
distortion of both,micrometer frame and work piece. To avoid this effect of contact press
micrometer is fitted with a ratchet mechanism with an operating thimble. The ratchet
‘when the applied pressure exeeeds the minimum required operating pressure.
\y. Avoldable erfors :- These errors may oécur due to parallexynon-alignment of work pi
centres,improper location of measuring instruments,etc. The error due to misalig
caused when the centre line of work piece is not normal to the centre line of the measui
instruments, :
causes, magnitudes and sense can iot be determined from the knowledge of measuring sys
or conditions of measurement. The possible sources of such errors are :
tions in the position of setting standard and work piece.
isplacement of lever joints of measuring instruments.py & Quality Contra
[Metrotogy
iii, Operator error ir scale rendine
iv, Fluctuations in sie friction in measuring instrument,
Q.14, Differentiate between systematic errors random errors,
Ans i= :
‘Systematic errors : I Random errors
‘Those errors are repeatitive in nature "These are non-consistent, The sources,
and are of constant and similar form. siving rise to such errors are random.
These errors result from improper _ Such errors are inherentiin the measu-
conditions or procedure that are ring system or measuring instruments.
consistent in action.
Except personal error, all other Specific causes, magnitudes and sense
systematic errors can be controlled of these errors can not be determined
in magnitude and sense, from the knowledge, of mcausring
. : system or conditions of measurement,
Af properly analysed, these errors |. These errors can not be eliminated, but
can be determined and reduced or the results obtained can be corrected.
even eliminated.
5. These errors include calibration errors, |5. ‘These errors include errors caused
errors due to variation i due to variation in position of setting
conditions, varia standard and work piece, errors, due
parallax errors, misalignment errors, etc displacement of lever joints of instru
: : -ments, errors resulting from back-
lash, friction etc,
Q.15. Explain the following terms used in measurements. Repeatability,
Reproducibility, sensitivity and readability, calibration,
Ans:
1, Repeatability :- It is the ability of mensuring system to reproduce the same results for
the measurement of same quantity when the measurements are carried out by the same
observer, with the same instrument,umder she same conditions and in short intervals of time.
2, Reproducibitity :- ft refers to the co sistency of pattem of variation in measurement
[Link] of agreement between the results of measurements of the same quantity when
individual measurements are carried out by different observers,by different methods,using
different instruments under different concitions.
3. Sensitivity and Readability + Sensitivity and readability, both the torms are associated
‘with the measuring instruments and not \sith the measurifig process. Sensitivity méasures the
ability of a measuring instrument to de ect small variations in a quantity being measured
Higher the abitity of suck detection of an instrument, more sensitive itis, but if the instruments11 Metrology & Quality Control
are made more sensitive they are easily affected by external effects such as temperature
variations, vibrations, etc, This affects the accuracy and precision of measurement. If an
instrament is more sensitive than requirement,it becomes difficult for operator to obtain a
reliable reading.
Readability refers to the ease with which the readings of a measuring instrument can be
read, It is the susceptibility of measuring instrument to have its indications converted into |
sméaningful number. To make micrometers more readable they are provided with veer scale.
Redsbility and henee accuracy ef measurement tan also [Link] by use of proper
magnifying devices. *
4. Calibration i I rafers to measurements ofthe messuring instruments, ie, framing of q
scale of the instrument by applying some standardised signals. Calibration is a pre-measurement.
process,generally cartied out by manufacturers. Consistent use of instruments affect their j
accuracy If the accuracy ig to be maintained, the instruments must be checked and re-
calibrated. [Link] of such calibration depend upon the severity. of use,environmental
conditions,accuracy of measurement required,ete, As far as possible calibration should be
performed under enviromental conditions which are very close to the conditions under which
actual measurements are carried out and as per manufacturers instructions or publiostandard §
practis. Ifthe output of ameasuring system is linear and repeatable, it can be easily calibrated.
Q.16, What is meant by magnification? Explain brief :
‘Ans : To improve the accuracy of measurement, small variations inthe quantity being measured
should be easily detected by measuring instrument and its readings should also bé easily
readable. For this the output signal from a measuring instrument is to be amplified or magnified.
‘Thus magnification means increasing the maghitude of output signal of measuring instrument
‘many times to make it more readable,
‘Magnification obtained in a measuring instrument may be mechanical, electrical, electronic,
optical or pieumatic.
Mechanical magnification is obtained by means of levers or geaf trains, In electrical
magnification, the change in the inductance or capacitance of electrical ircuitsmade by change
in the quantity being measured is uscd to amplify the output of the measuring instrument.
Electronic. magnifications is obtained by the use of valves,transistors or ICs, Optical,
‘imagnification uses principle of reflection and pneumatic magnification makes use'of compressed
air for amplifying the output of measuring instrurients,
Q.17. Givea brief classifiention of errors which may arise duing measurement
Ans : Types of error :- During measurement several types of errot may arise, These are
1. Static errors which includes.
a Reading errors.
', Characteristic errors.
¢. Environmental errors.|
we
an. | -2 Insturment loading errors .
La 3, Dynamic errors.
0.18. Describe the following error’s which may aéise during mensurement
be AL. Static errors.
ito. i, Loading errors. >
te. Static errors :- These errors result from the physical nature ofthe Yariable cémponents
ser {of measuring system.
“There are three basic sources of siatic errors. The static error divided by the measurement,
range (difference between the upper and lower limits of measurement) gives the measurement
ant precision,
Ja. Reading errors :- Reading errors apply exclusively to the readout device. These do not
heve any direct relationship with other types of errors within the measuring system,
tal [Reading errors include,
be ~ Parallax error
ch +imerpolation error.
wd | Attempts have been made to reduce or eliminate reading erors by relatively simple techniques,
For example, the case of mirror behind the readout pointer or indicator virtualy elminates
foccurance of parallax error. .
Interpolation error :- It is the reading error resulting from the inexact evaluation of the
position of index with regarding to two adjacent graduation inarks between which the index is
Hiocated Interpolation error can be tackled by increasing, using magnifier over the scalein the
visinity of pointer or by using a digital read out system,
__ | Characteristic errors :- It is definéd as the deviation of the output of the measuring system
1% [from the theoretical predicted perfermance or from nominal performance specifications,
Linearity errors, repeatability, hysteresis md resolution errors are part of characteristic
‘al errors ifthe theoretical outputs a straight line. Calibration erroris also included in characteristic
. error,
ai _ [il Loading Errors :-Losding errors results from the change in measuirand itself when itis
ad__ being measured, (i.e. after the mesuring system or instrument is connected for measurement.
Instrument loading error is the difference between the value of the measurand before and
ater the mesuring system is connected/contacted for measurement.
: For example, a soft or delicate component is subjected to defromation during measurement
Jdue to contact pressure of the instrument and cause 2 loading error. The effects of instrament
loading errots are unavoidable. Therefore, measuring system or instrument should be selected
instrument loading error in a pertigular measurement12 Metrology & Quality Control
Q.19. Match the following two parts
Part iL Part IL
i, Ertor resulting from the change in measurand a. Random error,
itself when its being measured.
fi, Error casued due to effect of surrounding b. Loading error.
iil, Error casused due to time variation in the measurand, ¢. Relative error.
iv. Absolute error divided by true value. d. dynamic error.
¥. Errorinherent in the mesuring system €. systematic error
vi, Repeatative type error. £ environmental error
Ans: @-0), G9, GE, ()-, )-@). Wi-MEASUREMENT
Q.1, Enumerate the importance-of measurement, define the term physical
mensurement. Describe in brief the elements of process of measurement <
oR
Q.1. Explain briefly the principles of measurement .
Ans.: Mechanical and production engineers are concerned with special aspects of mesurement
in designing and manufacturing engineering products. The engineering products vary widely
in size, scope etc but have one thing in common,namely,they have to be. performed to a
spécification involving dimensional aecuracy.
‘Measurement is an essential part of the development of technology and as technology
becomes:more complex the techinques of measurement becomes more sophisticated.
For every kind of quantity measured there must be unit to measure it. This will enable the
quantity to be measured in numbér of that unit. If we say that “A’ is longer than “B* untill and
unless we answer how much, our statement is incomplete. We must be able to express this
difference in [Link] Le. in terms-of numbers.
Physical measurement :+ A physical measurament can be defined as the act of obtaining
‘quantitative information about a physical object. [t can also be defined as the set of experimental
‘operations carried out to determine value of quantity.
Process of measurement :- The squence of operations necessary for the. execution of
measurement is called process of measurement.
“There are three important element:
i} Measurand ii) Reference
i, Measurand :- Measurand is the physical quantity or property like length, angle,
diameter, thickness etc. to be measured.
Wi. Reference :- It is the physical quantity or property to which quantitative comparisons
are made.
Ui, Camparator :« It is the means of comparing measurand with some reference.‘Suppose a fitter has to measure the length of [Link], he first lays his rule along the flat.
He then carefully aligns the zero end of his rule with one end of the M.S. flat and finally
compares the length of flat with the graduations on his rule by his eyes. In this example, the j
length of MS. flat is a measurand, steel rule is the reference and eye can be considered as a i
comparator.
Q.2. -What do you understand by “standards of measurement’ ? Explain briefly the jf
different systems of measurement.
‘Ans : A standard is defined as something thatis set up and established by authority as a rule
for the measurements of quantity,weight,extent,value or quality. Industry, commerce, 4
Intemational trade and in fact, modem civilization itself would be impossible without a good
system of standards, The role of standards is to support the systems which make measurements
possible throughout the world.
Systems of measurement :-A measureing system is based on few fundamental
units,[Link],mass, time,tomperature,etc. All the physical quantities can be expressed in
terms of these fimdamental units. The following systems of measurement are in use in different
countries.
1. EPS. System :- This system is used in English speaking [Link] system unit
of length is yard, unit of mass, weight or force is pound,unit of time is seconds and unit of
temperature is 0° Farenheit. This system, being inconvenient is steadily loosing populari
2. Metric System :- Metric system is the predominant system in the world. It is the
decimal system of weight and measure. It is based on metre as unit of length,kilogram as the
unit of mass and kilogram-force (kg-f} as the unit of weight or force. Unit of temperature is 0°
centigrade, This system is simple for calculation prirposes than FP.S. system,
3. SwLSystem :- This system is extension and refinement of the metric system. Itis more
convenient and superior to other systems, The unit of length is metre, unit of mass is kilogram,
and unit of weight or force is Newton. Unit of temperature is 0 centigrade. This system is
followeid today in most of the countries.
Q.3. What are tine standards and end standards? Explain in brief.
‘Ans : Line Standards:~ When length is expressed as the distance between two lines, it iz
called line standard. Both materia standards-yard and metre-are line standards, Line standards
are quick and easy to use, but they are not so accurate. The accuracy of measurement ky
these standards depends upon the skill of the user.
End Standards := When length is expressed as the distance between two flat paiallel faces,
itis known as end standard, eg, slip gauges, ends of micrometer anvilsetc. These standards
are highly accurate and used for measurements of close tolerances in precision engineering
2s well as in standard laboratories. A modem end standard consists fundamentally of a
hardended block or bar of steel. Its end faces are lapped flat and parallel to within few tenthsfundamental
[be expressed in
muse in different
b this system unit
hog popularity.
world, It is the
p kilogram as the
‘Measurement ar
of a micrometze by the process of lapping. Is size too can be controlled very accurately by
" the process of Inpping. Since primary standards are line standards, end standards must be
calibrated from line standard. -
Q-4, Distinguish clearly between line standard and end standard,
Line standard ‘End standard
- Length is expressed asthe distance) 1 Lengthis expressed as the Uidance
between two lines, . between two Mlat parallel faces.
2 With line standard, measurement i 2, Use of etd standards is time consuming.
quick and easy, :
Line standards, though can be accurately | 3. End standards have vety high accuracy
engraved, cannot be conveniently used and are suitable for close tolerance
for close-tolerance length measurement. length measurement,
‘These’aro ‘subjected to parallax errors, These are subjected to. wear on
measuring surfaces,
+ These are not subjected to wear except” | 5. No parallax error in the measurement
on leading end leads.
Can not be easily aligned with the axis” | 6. Can be easly aligned with the axis of
of meastirement, ‘measurement.
Examples: yard, metre, éte, 7. Examples: stip gauges, micrometers,
ete. -
Q5. What is wavelength standard? State the. necessity and advantages of wavelength
standard,
Ans : Material standards are subjected to destruction and their dimensions change slightly
with time, Also a considerable dfficutly is experienced while comparing and varfying the
sizes of gauges by using material standareds. It, therefore become necessary to have astandard
oflength, which will be accurate and inyariable, In 1829, Jacques Babinet, a French philosopher
Suggested that wave lengths of monochromatic light can be used as natural and invariable
Units of length. In 1960, orange radiation of isotope Krypton-86 was chosen for new definition
oflength;standard metre and yard were defined [Link] of wave lengths of Kr-86
Imetre = 16,50,763,73 wavelengths and
Lyard = 0.9144 metre,
Advantages of wave length standard :.
1. As wave length is not a physical one, itneed not be preserved,
2. Itis not subjected to destruction by wear and tear.
3. Dimenstons do not change with time,
‘4 This reproduceable standard oflensth. is possible to repeat measurement io avery
high accuracy. The error of reproduction is only ofthe order of 1 part in 100 million,
5. Comparing and vasifying of material standards (sizeof gauges) is simplified,= Metrology & Quality Control
Q.6. Write short note on “End bars? .
Ans : End bars or length bars are primary end standards used for the measurement of larger}
sizes of work. These'are high quality,carbon steel bars of about 20mm to 22mm diameter, 4
made in sizes varying from 10mm to 1200 mm, The bars are hardesied at the ends only. The
end faces are lapped. They have two [Link] slightly larger diameter at the “Airy” points
([Link] the length.) The bars are supported at these points so that the end faces are J
parallel to each ther. End bars are available in four grades. They are used by stndardising
Inboratories as reference standards for the calibration of combination end bars, which are in
everyday use. Combination end bars have their ends drilled and threaded to receive studs,
which are used to join two or more bars together.
Q.7., What dayou understand by linear measurement? Name the various instruments
used for linear measurements.
Ans ; Linear’ measurement applies to the measurement of lengths, diameters, height and
thickness, covering both extemal and internal measurements, Its principle is to compare the
diamensions to be measured with standard dimension which is calibrated on measuring
‘instrument. .
‘The instruments used for linear measurements can be classified into two groups =
i. Non-precision instruments such as steel rule, caliper, etc.
i) Précision instruments such as vernicr calipers, micrometers, slip gauges ete.
Q.8.. State the chairateristics which a precision instrument should have to function
properly.
Ans : To function properly precision instrument should process the following charactetistics,
i, Itshould be sensitive. If measuring instrument is sensitive, a smell change in the
measured dimension can be easily determined. But instrument design should be such,
‘thet its sensitivity remairis constant throughout the range of the dimension to be measured.
§.. It should possess high degree of accuracy so that it will be able to give the indications
close to the true values of he dimensions to be measured. -
i. Instrument should give nearly the same reading for repeated measurements oF same
iv, Calibration ofinstrament should be proper end clear.
y. Wear: ‘of the measuring surfaces and other parts of the instrument should be minimum
ion in moving parts of instrument should be minimum, so that it will not
Instrument should respond to small changes of the quantity measured:
Instrument should have metrological qualities constant et all times.
ix. Itshould be able to amplify the very small changes in the quantity to be measured.Q.9. What precautions are to be observed while using metalic scale?
Ans : The following precautions should be taken while using metallic scale:-
i. Generally the ends of scalé are worn out due to continuous use. Therefore, to avoid
error in measurement,end of scale should never be set with the edge of the part to be
measured.
To have correct reading of the dimension to be measured scale should never be laid flat
on the part to be measured. . .
i. Scale should never be used for cleaning between parts or as substitute for screw driver,
othérwise its edges and ends will be damaged. .
iv, To maintain sharpness or the graduations for easy and accurate reading, scale should
be cleaned with grease or dissolving fluids.
; To avoid parallax error, while making measurements, eye should be directly opposite
and 90 degree to the mark on the part to be measured,
Q.10, State the principle of vernier, Explain briefly the construction of vernier caliper.
Aus :.Principle : The accuracy of measurement can be increased by utilising the difference
between two seales or divisions which are’slightly different in size
‘Construction : Vernier caliper consists of two scales; one is xed and other is movable. The
fixed scale,called main scale is calibrated on L-shaped frame and carries a fixed jaw. The
movable scale,called vernier scale slides over the main scale and carries a movable jaw-Both
the scales have two mesuring tips, The accuracy of measurement depends on the cpndition of
the measuring tps eqisrenes and uniformity of alignment ofthe sliding fame
jeasuting tips { for internal dlomension
“_pmain state (Med scale)
Camping screw
movable jaw
‘measuring tips (tof exteric! dfamenslon
Fig.2i1 :
nt, ing tip surfaces are in contact with each other, scale
ROWS reading. An adjustment Screw is provided for finer adjustntent of movable jaw. Also an
rangement is provided to lock the slidiag scalo on the main scale.
1.11. Define least count of vernier instruments.-How is it determined ?
‘ns : To increase the accuracy of measurements, vernier instruments make use of the
ifference between two scales which are slightly different in size. These instruments have
{two seales: Main scale is fixed and vernier scale slides over the main scale, When zero on the
fmain scale coincides with the zero on the vernicr scale, the number of divisions on the vernierscale is one more than the number of divisions on the main scale with which it coincides.
the value of a division on vernier scale is slightly smaller than the value of division on m
scale
Least Count (1.C.) : is the difference between the values of main scale division and ver
scale division. It can also be calculated by the ratio of the value of minimum division on maf
scale to the number of divisions on vemnier scale,
123 main seate
rustle
Ht veenie
OLS 0 15 20 BB h——$ erate
Fig.2.2
Fig.2..2 shows a vernier having main Scale graduations of Imm and 25
scale coinciding with 24 divisions on the main scale. As 25 divisions on vernier scale mensu
‘24mm, the value of each division is 24/25 = 0.96 mm. The value of smallest di
main scale is 1mm. So, least count of the instrument = value of smellest division on
scale
= 1-096 = 0.04 mm .
oR 7
= Value of smaltest division on main scale
‘Number of divisions on vernier scale
a
3
= 0.04
Q.12. Give [Link] possible errors in vernier instruments. What precautions shoul
be taken to minimise them ?
Ans : The errors in the measurements carried out by a vernier instrument are usually due t
mainpulation or mishandling of the instrument and its jaws on the workpiece, The vario
causes of errors are given below.
Error due to sliding between jaws onthe scale, a.
tthe sliding jaw frame becomes wom or warped, it will Rot slide squarely and accuratal
on the miain scale. This will introduce error in the measurement.
‘Wear and warping of the jaws will also cause 0-0 points on the main and vernier scald
not to coincide with each other and will introduce error.est division on
division on
fautions should,
iv, Errors are also caused by misreading of the vernier scale or by incorrect adding of the
‘vernier scale coincident reading to the relevant main scale reading, But such errors are
‘not usual,
¥. Errors introduced ifthe tine of measurement doesnot coincide withthe line of the
scale,
vi Errors atso caused due to incorrect feel and touch. :
Precautions :- To minimise the ervors, the following precautions should generally be followed,
‘The line of measurement must coincide with tle line of the scale:
|. While measuring outside diameters, the plane of the measuring tips of the caliper must
be perpendicular to the centre line of the workpiece. The caliper should not bectilted.
ii, Grip the instrument near or opposite to the jaws and not by the overhanging projected
main bar of caliper.
ix. Move the caliper jaws on the work with light touch. Do not apply undue pressure.
«. Before reading, try the caliper again for feel and location,
"| Q.13. Explain the principlé of micrometer and hence define its least count.
'}- Ans : Micrometer uses the principle of screw and nut. We know that when a screw is turned
‘through nut through one revolution, it advances through one pitch distance Le. one rotation of
screw thread corresponds to pitch length. 1f the circumference of screw is divided into number
‘of equal parts, say “n’ its rotation through one division (on the circumference) will cause the
screw to advance through (Pitch/n) length i.e. the minimum length that can be measured by
such arrangement will be (pitelvn) By reducing the pitch of the screw thread or by increasing
the number of divisions on the circumference of screw, the length value of one circumferential
division can be reduced and accuracy of measurement can be increased considerably.
Least couht of micrometer is the value of one division on graduated collar connected to
screw (thimble), Ifthe pitch of serew thread is 0:5 mm and the thimble has 50 equal divisions
on the circumference, one division on the thimble equals to 0.5/50 i.e. 0.01 mm. Therefore
Jeast of count of the instrument is 0.01.
Q.14, What precautions should be taken While using a micrometer 2
|. Firstelean the micrometer by wiping off oil, dust and grit,
Clean the mesuring surfaces ofthe anvil and spindle with aclean piec¢ of paper of
dloth.
. Set the zero reading of the instrument before measuring.
|. Hold the part and micrometer properly. Turn the thimble with forefinger and thumb till,
the measuing tip just touches the part arid {inal adjustment should be made by ratchet
so that uniform measuring pressure is applied.
. While measuring dimensions of circular parts,the micrometer must be moved carefully
over representative area so as to note maximum dimension only.Q.15, “Micrometer anvil surfaces should be truly Mat and parallel", Why? With what]
instrument and how you will check flatness and parallelism of surfaces?
Ans : Micormeter is an end measuring device and (end standard.) It expresses length as the
distance betwéen its anvil surfaces. The lack of flatness and parallelism of the anvils will
result in incorrect functioning of the instrument and will cause errors in the: measurement. Sq
the micrometer anvil surfaces shouldbe of very high finish (at) and truly parallel to en
other.
Best instrument fo: mesurement of flatness and parallelism of micrometer anvil surfaces
is optical flat. When checking flatness, an optical flat is brought in contact with each of
‘vo anvils in turn and moved in sucha manner that minimum number of interference fring
are produced. By observing the number of fringes produced, the condition of flatness of an
surface can be determined, interference frignes [Link] each of the two anvits shoutd ng
‘be more than two for practically all ranges of grade I micrometers.
Parallelism of the anvils of micrometer can also be checked by using optical flai and a
paraliel plate. The interference fringes produced between flat perallel plate and anvil surfacd
are observed. The sum of the fringes observed on the two anvil surfaces indicate the degrd
-_ of parallelism between the surfaces, For 0-25 mm micrometers, the sum of the fringes shoul
‘not be moré than 6, for 25 to 75 mm micrometers,-not more than 8 and for 75 to 100 mj
microméters-not more than 10.
Q.16. Write short note on =
1, Surface plate, . 3, Tool maker’s straight edge,
2. Angle plate, 4, Vernier height gauge.
surface plates are extensively used in work shops and laboratories
reference surface for testing flatness of surface or as reference surface for all other measur}
ingtruments having flat bases, e.g. for mounting V-blocks, angle plates,sine bar, mechani
comparator, etc.
* Surface plates are massive and highly rigid in desi
They have truly flat leve) planes. These plates
generally made up of CI, free from blow holes, inclu
and other surface defects and are heat treated to reli
internal stresses. All the surface plates are of d
seetion arid properly ribbed at the bottom, so that i
are rigid enough to carry their own weights as well
SEEN) weights of heavy objects placed on them, witl
Sy appreciable deflection. The top surface is scrap:
sect iy,
Fig.2.3 fet and ceesonatly square to each other and toiterferénce fringe’
fof flatness of anvif
fp anvils should noj
Pica! flat and a:
and anvil surf
indicate the degra
the fringes sho
for 75 10 100
fhe botiom, so that t
pwn weights as well
ed on them, withd
bp surface is scraped
ping or by hand leppif
finished smooth, strai
-to each other and to
‘Measurement mea
top surface, Big surface plates are provided with four levelling screws to adjust their top
surfaces truly horizontal.
Surface plates are also made up of granite and glass. Granite surface plates are non-
corrosive and wear resistant. They are not affected by temperature variations or daimpness
and are heat and electric insulators. All granite plates are stable over reasonably long periods.
Glass surface plates are light weight and non-corrosive, They can be manufctured easily to a
higher degree of accuracy and maintain their accuracy for a longer period.
‘Surface plates are designted by their length, breadth, grade and number of Indian standard,
According to ISI they are classified into two grades :~
Gradel:
Maximum permissible departure from flatness 5 microns over an area of 300 mm x 300 mm.
Grade Mt:
Maximum permissilbe departure from flatness 20 microns over an area of300 mm x 300 mm.
Precautions >
‘To have minimum wear the whole surface of the plate must be used, Thé top surface of
the plate must be protected from corrosion by applying grease and when not in use, it should
be covered by wooden or hard board plate.
1. Angle plate : CI angle plates are widely used in
workshops or laboratories with surface paltes for
measurement purposes. The two working faces are
truly perpendicular to each other. Angle plates are
generally made form closed [Link]. After being
cast and rough machined, they are heat treated to
relieve internal stresses and are then finished. The
material used for these plates should be sound, free
from blow holes and porous patches. Generally no
sharp edges are allowed in the plate. “Angle plates
are available in two grades depending upon the
Fig.2.4 accuracy. .
Grade I:
Alll exterior and interior faces and edges be finished by either grinding or hand-scraping.
Grade lI:
All exterior faces are finished by planing or milling operation,
3, Too! maker’s straight edges :-These straight edges are used for very accurate work,
(|
‘Length uate Saram
Fig.2.5Metrology & Quality Control
Oe
‘Length upio 59 10 00mm
Fig.2.6
such as checking straightness and flatness of surfaces in tool room. They are made of suitab
cast or wrought alloy stee!, hardened and suitably heat treated to relieve the internal stress
and to give stability. They are avaitable in the range of 15 nim to 30mm,
‘The shapes of the sections of straight edges of various lengths are as shown in Fig.2,5 an
[Link] working edge, commonly known as knife edge is bevelled and very slightly réund
off throughout the length. The faces adjoining the working edge are ground flat. The workir
edge is finished by grinding and lapping.
4. Vernier height gauge :- Vernier height gauged
MAIN,
sate are used to measure or mark vertical distances. Thes
are mainly used in the inspection of parts and layot
work. A vernier height gauge consists of a graduate
bar held in the vertical position by a finely grouri
and lapped base, Other parts are measuring jaw 0
scriber, a slider with venier scale, fine adjustmed
screw, clamping screws; etc. All the parts are mad
of good quality steel or stainless steel. The base’
++ quite robust to ensure rigidity and stability of th
Measure insturment, The section of the beam is such that f
[3 i ensures sufficient rigidity during use. The measur
jaw has a clear projection from the edge of the bea
at Ieast equal to the projection of the base form tt
‘beam. The upper and lower surfaces of the jaw
parallel to the base. Slide bas good sliding fit alo
‘the full working fength of the beam and is provide
Fig.2.7 with an arrangement for fine adjustment.
Precautions :- When not in use, vernier height gauge is kept in its case. To ensure suficiey
accuracy in measurements, itis tested for straightness and squareness or parallelism of th
working faces of the beam, measuring jaw and scriber and the accuracy of the scale reading!
Q.17, What are the various instruments used for measuring flatness of a surface plat
Describe the'test procedure adopted for measuring flatness of a surface Ug
using one such instrument.
‘Ans : The various instruments used for measuring flantess of a surface plate are sensitis
evel, auto-collimator, Beam comparator, liquid surface gauge etc.iquid surface gauge method :-This is the most rapid method of testing flatness of large
surface plates with accuracy of order of 5 microns. Mercury or weak soda solution is used as
the basis of reference to compare the surface to be iested with liquid surface,
> wictometer ‘The liquid is contained in a trough made of iron
head channel, The trough carries a form of height gauge with
an overhanging micrometer head having a conical point
tothe spindle.
‘The spindle points downwards, The gauge is placed
over the surface to be tested. The inicrometer head is
screwed down untill the conical point ofthe spindle just
Toetetsie touches the liquid surface The exact position of contact
supply is determined with the help of on electrical indicator
Liquig _ circuit, the gauge is moved from place to place over the
surface and for each position a reading is taken, The
0.2.8 differences in the readings indicate the errors in flatness.
variations in the flatness of surface are thus compared with the true plane of the liquid
face. . :
.18. Describe the method of testing squarengess of angle plate with dial gague.
ng: The apparatus used for squareness testing consists of a single block end column
wing a knife edge near its base. A dial gauge is fitted over the column and can be adjusted
rertically on it. A square block having two opposite sides accurately paraliel is used for
sting the instrument.
‘The instrument is placed om a lat bast (surface palte) and one of the ye parallel faces (AB)
lof the square block is brought in contact with the knife edge. The dial gauge reading is
taken, The block is then tuned around and the opposite face (CD) is brought in contact
with the knife edge. The reading of the dial gauge is taken. The mean value of these two
readings repfesents squareness. The instrument is now ready for testing squafeness. To
fest the squareness of angle plate, itis placed on the surface plate and is brought in contactoa Metrology & Quality Control.
with the knife edge. The feading of the dial gauge is noted the difference between this
reading and the mean reading shows on error in squarencesé over the distance between the
knife edge and the dial gauge(L).
Q.19.. Explain the principle and uses of spirit level,
plass tube, The tube is nearly filled with eather or aledhol, except a small air or vapour
bubble,
Principle : The bubble always tries to remain
at the highest point of the tube. If the base of.
spirit level is horizontal , the centre point is the
highest point of the tube; so when the level is
placed on ahorizontal surface, the bubble rests
at the contre of the scalé. If the case of the
level is tilted through a small angle, the bubble
witl move relative to the tube a distance slong:
its radius corresponding to the angie,
‘The Fig,2,10 shows two positions of the ba
: > of the level (OAT and 02) and corresponding fa
Fig2.10 positions of the bubble (1.B2). When the base
(OAN) is horizontal the bubble occupies pos ‘BL. Let "8" be the small angle through}
which the base is tilted. The hubble now occupy the position B2, Let “I” be the distance
travelled by the bubble along the tube and'“h’ the difference in heights between the ends of
the base, then,
L= Ro and.h = 19
gw a Mo enk
1 ay
or a R = L or
‘Where R = Radius of curvature of the tube
L = Length of base
Sensitivity of spirit tevel is the angle of tilt in seconds that will cause the bubble to move
through one division, It depends upon the radius of curvature,length of bubble and internal]
radius of the tube.
Uses : Spirit levels are used to measure small angles or inclinations, to test straightness and
flamess of surfaces, ete.mn of the level
top of the
ir or vapour
bubble rests
[Link] of the
Measurement
Q.20. How straightness is measured. by using spirit level.
‘Two foct are attached at a convenient distance apartto underside of a sensitive spirit
vel, The level is moved along the surface to be tested in steps equal to the pitch distance
petween the feet and at éach position the reading af one end of the bubble is noted. Variations
fn the bubble position represent angular variations in surface and these are converted into
Lifference in the heights of the two feet. Thus by moving the level along the whole surface, -
fhe heights of the various points above or below the starting point can be determined.
21. Write short note on slip gauges.
lip gauges are used as standards of measurement in practically every precision
Pnaineering works. These are invented by C.E, Johansen of Swedan and are also called
Hohansen gauges.
Slip gauges are rectangular blocks made of high grade steel to exceptionally close
jolerainces. To resist wear, these are hardened throughtout by heating to about 760 degree.C.
fond quenching in water, They are then stabilised by heating and cooling successively in
tages so that hardening stresses are removed, after this the measuring faces of the blocks
‘carefully finished by high grade lapping to have good wringing surfaces, Sectional
imensions of these gauges are mun X 30 mm fof sizes upto 10mm and 9mm X 35 mm for
Barger sizes.
Slip gauges are available in the following five grades of accuracy :~
rade IE : Used in workshops for setting up machine tools,
rade 1: Used for more precise work such as setting up sine bars, checking gap gauges etc.
‘rade 0 : It is inspection grade and is used for tool room or machine shop inspection.
‘rade 00°: Used for highest precision work such as measuring Grade I and II.
libration grade : [Link] special grade and it is also used to measure other grades.
“The following two sets of slip gauges are in generat use:
set (M-48)
Range (mm) . : “pieces
1.003 to 1.009
1.01 to 1.09
1.1te1.9
9
9
9
1to9 . 9
101090 | a
rdEa Metrology & Quality Control
Special set (M87) :
Range (mm) Steps Pieces
1.001 to 1.009 0.001 9
LOL to 1.49 oct 0
05 1095 os 19
i ) 10 9
1.005, - . i
87
Q.22, State the meaning of wringing. What are the essential conditions of wringing?
or Explain wringing of slip gauges.
‘Ans: When iwo clean and very accurately fiat surfaces are slid together under pressure, !
they adhere firmly. This phenomenon is called wringing. Generally a minute amount ofg'"4
‘grease or moisture must be present between the surfaces for them to wring satisfactorily. f°
This effect is caused partly by molecuslar attraction between the surfaces end the liquid:
film and partly by atmospheric pressure, Use of this Phenomenon is made when several slip
‘gagues are to be used in combination, because the stack can then be handled as a unit]
without the need of clamping the pieces together.
Fig. -
‘To wring two slip gauges together, they are first cleaned because if any dust is pres
between the surfaces they woutd not wring together. After cleaning they are placed to}
at right angles in the form of a cross and then rotated through 90 degree. While bei
pressed together, This method causes less rubbing of the surfaces.
Q.23, What precautions should be taken while using stip gauges ?
Ans : Slip gauges are high precision measuring devices hence sufficient care should b
taken while using them. - :
‘When not in use, all the polished surfaces should be protected from atmospheric corrosio!
by applying petroleum jelly or other suitable anti-corresive agents.
They should be always kept in their cases which should be kept closed.
To prevent corrosion, gauges should not be touched by hand, if itis possible to avoid
doing so. They should be handled by using piece of chamois leather or tongs made from a|bviled as a unit
strip of perspex, Handling should be as minimum as possible (0 avoid transfer of heat from
body to the gauges.
After wringing, the surfaces should be wiped with solvent to remove finget marks, if
any. To remove grease, a clean ray soaked in petrol is first used, followed by another dry
and soft cloth and final cleaning is done by chamois leather.
After use the gauges are wiped and replaced in their proper compartments in the case.
24. Write short note on-Vernier depth gauge.
Ans : IL is used to measure the dapths'of holes, slots and recesses, to locate centre distances,
lc. It consists of a sliding head having flat and true base free from curves and waviness,
The sliding head slides over a graduated blade called beam. :
‘The beam is perpendiciilar to the base in both directions and its end is sqaure and flat.
‘The end of sliding head can be set al anv point with fine # Siustment on it! While using this
instyyment,hold the b2se-oT the sliding head firmly on thé reference surface and move gauge
beam to measure tlie depth without appiting undue pressure,
: Fine
adjustment
ewe stecking
Main
seaie
Beam
Measuring
base
Fig.2.12 verwier Degls Gaugt
While using this instrument, hold the 8ase of the sliding head firmly on the reference
® While being Feurtace and move the gauge beam to measure the depth without applying undue pressure,
uve set with 87 pieces, as under, is available :
“Sap Pieces Ranges Step Pieces
100110? 0.001 9 10.1990 0
Lore Lay ool 9 1.005 oe
0.51095 {os »Ewa Metrology & Quality Control
Ans:
i. For last decimat place of 0.008, choose 1.008 mm slip gauge
‘Now dimension left is 29.758 -1.008 = 28.75mm
For second decimal place of 0.05 ,choose 1.25mm slip gauge.
Dimension left = 28.75 -1.25 =27.5mm
Now choose 20mm and 7.3mm slip gauges to build the required dimensions,
Thus, we have 20 + 7.5+ 1.25 + 1.008 = 29.758mmi.e. the above four stip gauges,
are required to build 29.758mm.
To build dimension 46.635mm, choose the following slip gauges.
1,005 + 1.13 +45 +40 =46.635 mm,
i.e. the above four slip gauges are required to build 46,635 mm.
Q.25 Describe V Block. State its uses.
‘Ang : TheV-block is made of CLI with all the faces machined true, V grooves are provided
con two oppisite sides and stots on other two faces as shown in fig. 2,13. Generally the angle of,
Vis 90° and these are available in wide variety of shapes. U-clamps are provided to secure
the work firmly on the V-groove.
re ice
io
Fig. 2.13 van
‘V-blocks are mainly used for the following purposes.
1. To hold the cylindrical work pieces firmly for marking centees,
2. For checking out of roundness of cylindrical work pieces.
3. To establish precisely the centre line or axis of cylindrical work pieces,
4, They may also be used to support rectangular campenents at 45° to the datum
surface, .
5. V-blocks ate also manufactured in pairs for holding and supporting long circular
components parallel to the datum surface.
Depending upon the accuracy IS :2949-1964 specifies the V-blocks in two grades ; grade
‘Aand grade B, These grades vary only in the amount of flatness tolerance on the working
faces of the blocks, V-blocks having 120° included angles between V-grooves are also available,Bded to secure
fhe working
Bo available.
Inusing V-block, itis very essential that the cylindrical piece should rest firmly on the sides
of the V and not on edges, Theze blocks should be checked periodically for basic accuracy
and should be prevented from rusting.
Q.26 Write short notes on
2) Feeler Gauge
2) Screw pitch gauges
3) Radius gauges
4) Wire gauges
Ang :Feeler Gauge
Feeler gauge is used to measure/ check the clerance between the two mating [Link]
example, it can be used in gauging of the clearance between the piston and cylinder and also
for adjusting the spark gap between the distributor points of an automobile, The feeler gauge
set consists of narrow strips of sheet steel of different thickness assembled (hinged) together
inaholder.
Fig. 2.14 Feeler Gauge
Their working entirely depends upon the sense of feel. In using the strips (blades), itis
essential that the strips should neither be forced betiveen the surfaces nor slide freely. The
correct strip or a combination of strips will give a characteristic 'gauge fit type of feel.
A set of feeler gauge generally consists of a series of blades of thickness varying from
0.03 10 1 mm, The blades are triade of heat treated bright polished too! steel, The width of the
blade in 12 mm at the heal and tapered for outer part of their length so that the width at the tip
is approximately 6 mm, The holder protects the blade when not is used. The nominal thickness
of the blade is marked on it legibly.
18 : 3179 recommends seven sets of feeler gauges with thickness from 0.03 to 1.00 min,
Each set is devised so as to permit maximum utility with minimum number of blades. Table
‘below gives the thickness and number of blades in each sct as recommended by Indian Standard
18:3179,Fx Metrology & Quality Control
E
Set No. No. of blades in ‘Thickness of blades in mm
in the set
1 8 19.03 to 0.01 in steps of 0.01
2 9 0.03, 0.03, 0.04, 0.04, 0.05, 0.05, 0.06, 0.07, 0.08
. 16 0.03; 0.04, 0.05, 0.96, 0.07, 0,08,0.09, 0.1, 0.15, 0.20.
0.25, 0.30, 0.35, 0.40 , 0.45, 0.50
4 n - "0.03; 0,04, 0.05, 0.06, 0.07, 0.1, 0.15, 0.20, 0.30, 0.40
050 . 7
5 “4 6.05, 0.06, 0.07, 0.08, 0.09, 0.1, 0.15, 0.20, 0.25, 0.30,
0.40, 0.50, 0.75, 1.0
6 u * 9105,0:06, 0.07, 0.08, 0.09, 0.10, 0.15, 0.20, 0.40, 0.7
10
Toc "0.50, 055,0,60, 0.65, 0.70, 0.75, 0.80, 0.85, 0.90,
095,08” so
h Gauges + -
h gauge,js used to check the piteh of the [Link]. They quickly determine
the pitch of the thread by matching the teeth on the strips with the teeth on the work. They are
available with 5$° and 60° included thread angles. A typical setis shown in fig. 2.15.
Radius Gauges * .
Radius eauges are employed for checking extemal gnd internal radii on a curved surface,
Radius gauges consists of sets of blades. The corresponding radius is permanently marked on
each blade. The set consists of blade with intemal radius on one side and external radius on
the other, so that it may be suitable for cheking fillets as well as radius. The’ passage of light
between the gauge and the work illows the radius to be checked properly.0.07, 0.08
b,0.1; 0.150.204
0.20, 0.30; 0.40,
f 0.20, 0.25, 0.30,
0.20, 0.40, 0.75,
curved surface.
Bienily marked on
ternal radius on
P passage of light
-Figa2.16 Radius Gauge
Wire Gauge
Wire gauge (Fig, 2.17) are used for finding diameters of wires by inserting the wire in the
notches provided and finding out which it fits. The diameter and the number marked on the
disc are réad off from the [Link] wire gauge has the range from 0.1 mm to 10mm.
Fig.2.17. Wire Gauge*
LIMITS, FITS AND. GAUGES
Q.1. Explain; with the help of 2 sketch the fotloing terms :-
i. Basic size, ii, Limits of size, iii, Deviation, iv. Zero line, v. Tolerance
vi. Fundamental deviation.
Ans:
‘amen, i. Basic size : It is the standard sizq
fiostee oy Morar of a part with reference to which all
the limits of variations of size ar
determined. 1tis same for both hole
and its shaft
if, Limits of size are the two extr
permissible sizes of a part betweel
which the actua! size of that parti
Figs. ‘contained, The greater of these tw
sizes is called maxi rum limit or high limit of size, while the smaller size is the minimum lim
orfow limit of size
Deviation : It isthe amount by which the size of a part deviates from its basic siz
tis the algebraic difference between a size and basic size. The algebraic differenc
between high limit of size and corresponding basic size is called upper deviation, whil
difference between low limit of size and basic size is lower deviation
iv, Zero line + It is the line of zero deviation and represents the basic size. In th
graphical representation of limits and fits, all the deviations are shown wax. the zero lin
positive deviations above the line and negative deviations below the line
¥. Tolerance : Itis the algebraic difference between the upper end lower deviatior
and hes an absolute value without sign, It can also be defined as the difference betwee
high and low limits of si:kx UC Metrology & Quality Control
vi, Fundamental deviation : It is either upper deviation or lower deviation which is
[conventionally chosen to define the position of tolerance zone in relation to the zero line.
Q.2.. What do you understand by-Limits, Fits, Tolerance and Allowance,
[Ans : Limits : H isnot possible to obtain exact dimensions of a part because of the variations
in man and machine, Also it is costly affair to obtain perfect size of a part, Therefore, the
ranges of permissible differemce in dimensions have been standardised under the name limits,
The limits of size of a dimension are two extreme permissible sizes between which the actual
size of the dimension is contained, The grester of thés¢ two is called maximum or high limit of
size, while smaller size is the minimum or low limit of size,
Fits : Fit is the relationship existing
erence Tolerance between two parts during assembly due
Nem to the difference in their sizes, It is the
[Link] degree oftighiness ar looseness betwoen
JPeronce "two mating parts to perform a definite
FH function. Depending upon the actual
cS limits of the hole or shaft sizes, fits may
be classified as: Clearance fit. Interference
fit or Transition Git.
Toterance : It is rather difficult or
Fig. 3.2 even impossible to make a part to exact
given size, It is, therefore, essential to allow a definite variation in the size of the part
This pormissable variation in size or dimension of partis called tolerance. Tolerance is
the difference between maximum and minimum limits of size, it is the algebric difference
id between the upper and lower deviations.
"J Altowance : Allowance is the prescribed difference between the dimensions of two
‘mating parts (hole and shaft) for any type of fit. It is the intentional difference between
the lower limit of the hole and higher limit of the shaft. The allownace may be positive or
negative. The positive allowance is called clearance, while negative allowance is called
interference, .
Q.3," Differentitate between Telerence and Allowance.
Ans :
Tolerence Allowance
1. It is the permissible variation in 1. Iris the prescribed difference between
. dimension of a part (hole or shaft) the dimensions of two mating parts
Chole and shaft),
2. Mis the difference between higher and |2_ Mis ntential difference between the tower
Jower limits of a dimension of a part, limit ofhole and higher limit of shalLimits, Fits and Gauges
3. Tolerence is to be provided ona 3. Allowances is to be provided on the
dimension of part as itis not possible dimensions of mating parts to obtain
fo make a part of exact specified required type of fit
dimension. .
4, Wthas an absolute value without sign, | 4. Allownace may be positive
(clearance) or negetive. (interference) |
Q.4, Write short notes on i. Limits, ii, Fits and its types.
Ans:
actual size of that dimension is contained. They are fixed with reference to the basic size off
that dimension. The bigher limit for that dimension is the largest size permitted forthe dimensiog
and lower limit is the smallest size permitted. e.g. a shaft of 25 mm basic size may be writteg
as25 8° The higher limit ofthe dimension is 25.02 mm and lower limit for the dimension if
24.98 mm,
Fits and its types : When two parts ere to be assembled, the relation resulting fron
the difference between their sizes before assombly is calted fit, Iris the degree of tightness of
looseness between two mating parts to perform a definite function, Various kinds of engagemer
between the hole and shatt result from the difference between their average sizes. Dependin
upon the actual limits of the hole or shaft sizes, fits may be classified as :-
Giearance fit :- It denotes the condition of assembly of two mating paris in which the sizt
limits of these parts are so chosen that positive allownace i.e, glearance will always occur.
Min clecrance Interference
WZ Vy
Mox,
clearance
rd
ftitive 4
(interference)
CE Meatrtony & Quality Contra]
4 The largest permissible shaft size is smaller than the smallest permissible hole size. Sliding fit
and running fil are the examples of clearance fit.
Interference fit : In this fit the sizes of the mating pars are so selected that interference or,
negative allowance will always occur. The minimum permitted shaft size is larger than the
‘maximum permitted hole size, Press fit, driving fit, shrink fit and force fit are the examples of
this type of fit.
‘Teansition {it : In this type of fit, the size limits of mating Po“
(shaft and hole) are so selected that either clearance or
interference may occur depending upon the actual sizes of the
Hole parts, Push fit and light keying fit are examples of this type of
Fig.3.5 fit
QS. What is tolerance ? Explain unilateral and Bilateral systems of tolerance.
Ans + Itis never possible to make a'part or.a component exactly to @ given size of dimension
and no method is avaitable for absolutely accurate measurement of that dimension; It therefore,
is essential to allow a definite permissible variation on every specified dimension. This
permissible variation in size or dimension is callegd tolerence. Thus, the word tolerance indicates
that a worker is not expected to produce the part to the exact size, but a small size error is
permitted, The difference between higher and lower limits of @ dimension represents the
‘margin for variation in workmanship and is called tolerence zone,
Tolerance can also be defined as the amount by which the job is allowed to go away
from accuracy and perfectness without causing any finctional trouble, when assembled
with the mating pac{ and put into actual services. e.g. for a shafi of dimension 25 +,
tolerance = 25,02 “24,98 = 0.04 mm,
Tolerance for a particular dimension may be allowed to vary either on one side of the basic
size or both sides of the basic size, There are two systems of specifying thé tolerence of a
‘component.
Unilateral systen :- In this system, the dimension of a partis allowed to vary only on one
side of the basic dimension or size ie. tolerence lies wholy on one side of the basic size.
emma Teron
p
either above or below it+002 +002 -0,01 +0.00
+001 = 0.00 + 0.02 + 0.02
“e.g. 25 25 25 ~ or 25
‘This system is preferred in interchangeable. manufacture, especially when precision {
are required, because it is easy and simpler to determine deviations. Another advantage of
system is that Go gauge ends can be standardised as the holes of different tolerance g
have the same lower limit and all the shafis have same upper limi
iateral system : In this system, the dimension of a part is permitted to vary on both sig,
of the basic size ie, limits of tolerence lié on either side of the basic size; but may not
© necessarily equally disposed aboutit. *
som
002. :
e.g 25 or 259%
Toterance- In this system it is not possibie to retain the sam
when tolerance is varied and basic size of one or bo
the mating parts to be varied . This system is usey
Jarge size manufacture. Bilateral tolerances hel
machine setting.
Q.6. Explain briefly Hole [Link] and shaft basis system of Limits ang rig
‘Ans + A limit and fit system is the system of series of standard allowances and tole
suit specific ranges of basic size, which, when property selected and assigned to mating,
ensure specific classes of fit. There are two systems of limits an¢ fits.
1. Hole Basis system : inthis system, the deg
¢ of hole, whose lower deviation (fundamef
cg *eviation) is zero (H-hole) is assumed as basic
7 ee and Aifferent clearances and interferences (to
fe eh ferent classes of fit) are obtained by varying
asc sin). © nits of he shat In other words; the limits of
hole ave kept constant and those of the shaft
Fig.38 varied 39 ag to obtein the necessary fit.
Hide,
Refer fig. 3.8.
1, Clearance fit, 2. Transition fitand 3. Interference fit.
‘There are considerable advantages in using hole basis system of limits and fits. This sys
is recommended by ISI India and preferred in industries, because itis very easy, conver
and less costly to make ahole of correct size-by using standard drills, reamers, etc. Itis
much easier to vary shaft sizes according to the fit required, by adjustable methods sua}
grinding and turning, Also gauging can be conveniently done with adjustable gap gauge
direct external measurement is easicr than internal measurement.2, Shaft basis systes
An this system, the design size of a shaft whose upper deviation
(fundamental deviation) is Zero (h-shaft) is the basic‘¥ize and different clases of fit are
obtained by varying the limits on the hole i
the limits on the shaft are kept constant and
those on the hole are varied to obtain desired classes of fit. :
ale
co
ee cas —
rst =O @ 8
Fig39
Bosic size
Inshass production, use of this system will need
large amount of capital and storage space for the
large number of tools required to produce holes
for of different sizes, because drills, reamers,
bbroaches, punches, etc, an not be adjusted to vary
the size. So this method is not preferred in mass
production. This system is suitable when a long
shaft of uniform diameter has to carry variety of aécessories having different fits, Such as
putleys,gears bearings, coupling etc,
Q.7 Difference between -Hole basis system and shaft basis system,
Ans:
‘Hole Basis System
‘Shaft Basis System
1. Size of hole whose lower deviation
(fundamental deviation )is 22r0
(ELhole) is assured as the basic size.
2, Limits on the hole are kept constant
arid those of the shaft are varied fo
obtain desired type of fit,
3, System is preferred in mass produc-
tion because it is easy, convenient
and less costly to make a hole correct
size,
4, teis much easy to vary the shalt sizes
according to the fil required,
5, Itrequires tess amount of capital
and storage space for tools needed to
produce shafts of different sizes,
5. Gauging of shafts can be easily and
conveniently done with adjustable gap |
gauges.
. Size of shaft whose upper deviation
(Gandamental deviation) is zero (h-shafl)
is assumed as the basis size.
Limits on the'shaft are kept constant and
those on hole are varied to have
necessary fit,
System isnot suitable in mass production
because it is inconvenient and costly to
make a shaft of correct size.
{" INis rather difficult to vary the hole sizes
according to the fit required,
Itneeds large amount of capital and
storage space for large number of tools
required to produce holes of different sizes,
. Being internal measurement, gauging of
holes cannot be easily and conveniently
done.
Q.8. Study the following figure and answer the'following :-
1. Name the type of fit for assembly,
H. State the system of Toterance.
iil, Name the system of Tolerance for Hole and shaft.Linnits, Fits and Gages
iv. Determine the values of fiaximum and minimum values of allowances.
Ans:
i. The size limits of hole and shaft are such that either clearance or interference ma
occur during assembly, so the type of fit assembly is transition ft
ii, The system of tolerance is Newall syste
+oae because it is hole basis system,
Iss iii, System of tolerance for Hole is unilater
=001
Yileronce Zone Talevence Zone
Shatt Hole
- Fig.3.10 shaft=0,035 mm,
Maximum interference or negative allowance = Minimum size of hole-maximum size q
shaft =0.016 mea,
Maximum and minimum allowance are 0.035 min and 0.016 mm respectively.
Q.9. Study the given Fig3.11 and answer the following.
i, Redraw the given fig, proportionately and name the portions indicted by A to
a ct
Fig.3.11
. Find the magnitudes of Lower and Upper deviation,
iti, Find the magnitude of maximum allowance.
iv. What type of fit itis?
Fig.3.12
Q.10, What is Interchangebitity ? State its advantages.
‘Ans + In old days producion was confined to small number of parts. The same worker used
produce the parts and assemble them to obtain necesgary fits, But modern trend is ton7 Metrology & Quality Control
1ass production in which parts are made by different workers in different plants and assembled
in one shop. Under such conditions,the dimensions of the various mating parts must strictly lie
Within certain variations so that any one part sélected randomly will assemble correctly with
y other mating part that too chosen randomly. Such system is called interchangeable system
br system of limits and fits.
i] _Interchangeability is possilbe only when certain standards are strictly followed in various
janufacturing units. For universal interchangeability, international standards should be followed.
yen all the parts to be assembled are manufactured in a single unit, focal standards may be
Production is increased considerably.
Results in reduced production cost.
Simplifies replacement and repairs of wom out or defective parts, so maintenance
cost is very much reduced.
iv. Aworkerisconcemed wit itited work, sohe can easily specialise himself in that
work, This results in superior quality of work,
Assembly time is reduced considerably, so-production rateis increased,
vi, Different components can be manufactured in different parts of the country, depending
upon the availabilty of raw materia, shiled labour and other facilites, This reduces
cost of production considerably.
p.11. Write short note on - Selective assembly.
ns : In selective assembly, the parts of any one type are clatsfied into several groups
‘ording to size. The mating parts are also classified into same number of groups, so that the
prresponding groups, when assembled will give the desired fit at assembly with little or no
wither riachining, In this method the parts are manufactured to rather wider tolerances and
en seperated into number of groups according to their actual sizes. Assembly is then made
fom the selected groups. Selective assembly results in reduced cost of production without
Hecting the quality of the product. itis often followed in air craft, automobile industires and
{BP ball and roller bearing industries.
)-12. How holes, shafts and fits are designed ?
ns : To describe completely a hole or a shaft, its basic size followed by appropriate letter
id the number of tolerance grade is given. a hole is designated by capital letter while shaft
fy small letter. e.g. 20 mm H-hole with tolerance grade IT7 is designgated os 20 H7 and
mm “g’-shaft with tolerance grade 1T7 is designated as 2087.
A itis indicated by its basic'size followed byappropriateleter andthe nuber of tolerance
adeis given, capital letteP while shaft by small Peter. ¢.g.20 mm H-
ith tolerance
dicted by Ato
Her trend is towarLimits, Fits and Gauges
two components, the hole being quoted first,
20H, oF no
Q.13. Interpret the meanings of the foltowing fits :
Ff, HE, by Hy ry Hy,
Ans: 7
HH, f,:H, is the basic hole with tolerance grade IT7. f, is shaft with tolerance gi
IT6. This shaft gives clearance fit with basic hole H, . It gives normal running fit and is wi
used for grease or el lubricated bering suchas gearbox shaf bearings smal electic
bearings, pump bearings, etc, This system is hole basis system.
ii. Hh, 2 This ishole basis system. With hole H,, shafth gives a cloarance fit whig
itable for non-running parts. e., for spigot and location fits. j
‘74, : Thisis also hole basis system. With basic hole H,, shalt r, gives interferenc
It produces medium drive fit on ferrous parts and light drive fit on non-ferrous parts which
~be easily dismantled,
iv, T1,v,+ H, is the basic hole. v,is shaft with tolerance grade ITS. This shaft gives i
interference fit with basic hole H, and not recommended for use,
Q.14. What are limit gauges ? sketch any two types of limit gauges.
Ans + Manufectured parts must be checked to determine whether they lie between ‘he g
limits of size. In mass production it will be very time consuming to measure the dimensio
each part, therefore instead of measuring actual dimensions of each part, the conformang
part with tolerance specification can be checked by gauges. Gauges are scaleless inspeq
tools of rigid design, that are used to check dimensions, form and relative positions o
surfaces of parts, They do not determine the actual size of part, but define whether
deviations in the actual size or dimensions of part are within the specified limits. They cl
whether a part lies between the two limits of its size, so they consist of two sizes correspon
to their maximum and minimum limits
Limit gauges are widely used in engineering beacause they are easy to use, requir
adjustment in their use and no claculations are required 10 be made for determin;
variations in size.
Cesena Ge
st a rig
Date ene es 58
Fig. 3. 13Ela ‘Metrology & Quality Control
Q.15. Explain the principles of GO and NO-GO gagues.
‘Ams : For checking the dimension of work piece, limit gauges usually have two working sizes;
one corresponds to the low limit size and other to the high limit size of that dimension. These
are known as GO and NO-GO gauges. The difference between the sizes of these two gauges
is equal to the tolerance on the work piece, GO gauge checks the minimum metal condition of
the work piece, In case of hole, GO gauge corresponds to the low limit size, While NO-GO
{gague corresponds to the high limit size. For shafi GO gauge corresponds to the low limitsize.
A part is considered to be good, if the GO gauge enters it and NO-GO gauge fails to enterit
under the action ofits mass. This indicates that the actual dimensions of the part are within
the specified tolerance. If both the gauges fail to enter, it indicates that hole is under size ot
shaftis over size. XC both the gauges enter, it shows that hole is over size or shaft is under size.
Q.16. What is Taylor's principle as applied to design of limit gauges ?
‘Ans + Itstates that GO gauges should be of full form i.e. they should check shape as well as
size of part, whereas NO-GO gague should check only one dimension of the part. As GO,
‘gauge assembles with the mating component it should check number of dimensions, including
errors of form such as straightness, roundness, squareness etc. which are outside the maximum.
metal limit,, NO-GO gauge, on the other hand should check only one dimension of part at a
time in order to find out any dimension which is outside the minimum metal limit.
To illustrate the principle consider a part having a rectangular hole. If a pin gauge for
Jength and width,made to the lower limits of their respective dimensions is used, it will enter
into the hole and thereby indicate that the hole is satisfactory,although the corners may not be
square, Itis therefore, necessary for Go gauge to be rectangular plete Le. geometrical equivalent
‘of mating part or full form gauge, However, if NO-GO gauge is of full form, it will not enter
the part, even if only one dimension of the part is correct, Thus if gauge is of rectangular
shape made to upper limits of their respective dimensions (width and length), it will not enter
‘the hole even if only width is correct and length is excessive or length is correct and width is
excessive. NO-GO gaguge must, therefore, consist of two seperate pin gauges, one for length
and other for width,
Q.17. What is gauge maker’s tolerance ?
Ans ¢ In pratice gauges can not be manufactured to exact size, The closer the limits are held,
the more expensive the gauge is, Also some variations in size can not be eliminated due to
imperfections in the process or skill of worker. Some allowance must, therefore,be given to
‘gauge maker for manufacturing gauges, This is known as Gauge maker’s tolerence or Gauge
allowance. Logically the gauge tolerence [Link] be [Link] small as possitbe, but this will
increase the'cost of manufacturing the gauges. Limit gauges are generally provided with
‘Bauge allowance of 1/10th of work tolerance.
Q.13, State why and how wear allowances are considered in gauge des
‘Ans : As soon as gauge is put into service, its measuring surfaces rub constantlyLiwiis, Fits and Gauges
surfaces of the work piece. This results in the wearing of the measuring surfaces of gauge
‘The gauge loses it’s initial dimensions. The size of GO plug gauge is reduced and that of rin;
or gap gauge is incteaed. Hence a wear allowance is provided to the gauges in the directioi
opposite to that of the wear. In case of GO pplug gauge, wear allowance is added, while in ring
or gap gaugeit is substrated.
Q.19. Differentiate between i) Workshop gauges and Inspection gauges. ii) GO threa
plug gauge and NO-GO thread plug gauge.
Ans:
Workshop gauges
Inspection gauges
1. ‘These gauges are used during
manufacture of paris in shops.
2 upper toference timit
NO-GO
wher toierence 89
tolerence on workshop gauges
are arranged to fall inside the
work tolerence.
Parts which are in work tolerence
imits may be rejected when tested
by workshop gauges.
“These gauges are used for final inspection
of parts.
capper toterence Knit
Zz saa 80-60
weer
Lower tolerence timit
The tolerence on inspection gauges are
arranged to fall outside the work tolerance
|. Parts that are not in work tolerence may
be accepted when tested by inspection
_ ghages. >
GO thread plug gauge
NO-GO thread ping gauge.
Ttis full form and is made to
‘the minimum effective diameter
of screw thread.
Ut checks vinwal effective
diameter, errors in pitch or flank
angles of thread.
‘Tolerences on these gauges-ire
arranged within the work tolerance.
. Itis made to maximum effective diameter
of screw thread.
It checks maximum effective diameter
of thread.
. Toterence on these gauges ere arranged
the work tolerence,
Q.20,Draw a neat sketch of double ended snap gauge and indicate on it variou
lentification marks, State in which measurement it is used,
‘Ans : Snap gauges are suitable for gauging both cylindrical as well as non-cylindrical worl
Double -ended snap gauges are used for checking sizes in the range of 3mm to 100mm.Valves of deviations
Cotor work piece
mes clO8S Of tterance
Fig. 3.14
Q.21. Discuss briefly the use of limit gauges to control the size of parts on shop floor,
Ans : In mass production, where large number of parts are to be manufactured, it is not
possible to make all the parts alike and to exact dimensions, Also, no method is available for
absolutely accurate masurensents of the dimensions of the meenufactured parts. Therefore,
without affecting the functional quality of parts, small size errors are allowed in their dimensions.
‘These are called tolerances. Thus two permissible limits of sizes ofthe part are specified. The
actual size of the part must lie within these limits, The limits of sizes of paits are so selected
that a satisfactory functioning is assured on assembly. In shops, the manufactured parts must,
be checked to determine whether they lie between the specified limits of size. In mass
production, it is very time consuming to measure the dimensions of each part; therefore,
instead of measuring actual dimensions of each part,the conformance of part with tolerence
speciations can be checked easily and rapidly by limit gauges. The gauges not only check the
dimensions of part,but also check the form of the part and relative position of the surfaces.
Consider a cylindereal male part. In addition to checking the sizes of the part, ring and gap
gauges can deteci errors such as lobing, raised imperfections, bending, drunkenness (i.e. waved
centre line) barreling, indented imperfections, etc. To check the sizes of cylindrical holes and
errors in their forms double énded plug gauge or progressive type plug gauge can be effectively
used. The various elements of serew thread can be easily and rapidly checked by screw
thread gauges.
Thus we see that, though limit gauges do not determine actual size of the manufactured
Barts, they can conveniently and rapidly determine the errors in the permissible sizes and
forms of the manufactured parts; so they are extensively used in workshops and for inspection
‘purposes,
Q.22, Sketch a progressive type of “GO? and “NO-GO" plug gague suitable for 25H,
hole, Wear and manufacturing allowances need not be cor (ered. For 25H
hole fundamental deviation fs zero and IT7 is 21 microns.Limits, Fits and Gauges
b. State one advantage and one disadvantage of this type of gauge when compai
to double-ended plug ga
¢. How can you identify the GO snd NO-GO ends of double-ended plug gauges!
Ans:
8, Fundamental deviation of the hole (ie, lower deviation) =0
IT7=21 microns.
c+ Upperdeviation = 21 x 107 = 0.021 mm
ean
c+ Limits of 25H, = 25°
Lower limit of hole= 25 mm and
upper orhigh limit ofhole = 25,021 mm.
‘+ Since wear and manufacturing allowanes are not to be considered, size of GO
gauges = 25 mm and size of NO-GO gauge =25.021 mm
b. Advantage of progressive type gauge is that, as th
Red cout bo gauge is not to be reversed each time gauging is done
— more rapidly. Disadvantage is that it can not be used]
a E {| I for checking shailow blind holes such as recesses,
¢, NO-GO portion of double ended gauge is made shorta
than GO portion arid also itis painted with red cotour'
Fig.3.18 band.
Q.23, Desiga the “Workshap’, “Inspection” and “General’ types af GO and NO-GO
plug gauges for checking the hole of 6 30% Assume each of the wear alowance
and gauge allowance as 10% of work tolerance.
Ans : Lowlimit ofhole = 30-0.33 =29.97 mm.
High limit ofhole = 30+ 0.05 = 30.05
Worktderance = 0.08
Gauge tolerance = wear allowance = 10% of work tolerence.
25021
= 0.1 x 0.08
0.008 mm.
work !PECHION Genre!
gouge one Ko-Go
‘dowance wear
Gauge ctlowance | allowanceMetrology & Quality Control
i. Workshop gauge:
UpperlimitofGO gauge = 29.97 + 0.008 + 0.008
= 29.986 mm=30- 0.014
Lower limit of NO-GO gauge = 29,97 + 0,008 = 29.978 mm.
Limits of GO gauges = 3
‘Upper limit of NO -GO gauge =-30.05 mm
Lower limit of NO ~GO gauge = 30.05 - 0.008 = 30.042 mm
+ 9995
Limits of NO-GO gauge = 30° °°?
fi. Inspection gauge :
ps ® coo
Limits of GO gauges 30°° 0 008
930)
oat
not be used Limits of NO -GO gauges = 30°°*
Brecesses, J ili, Generat type of gauge:
de shorter | Limits of GO gauge = 30°°?
fh red colour’ : ae
Limits of NO -GO gauge = 30°
.24. Design the general type GO and NO-GO gauge for components having 20H,f,
fit, Give
1. i (micron) = 0.45 YH + 0.001D (where D in mm)
2. Upper deviation of *¢? shaft =-5.5 D™!
3. 20 mm falls in the dimeter step of 18mm to 30mm,
4, YT7 = 16i, S)IT, = 281
6. Wear allowance 10% of gauge allowance.
3
D. = ig x 50 = 23.2379 mm.
i= 0.45 Yg5575 +0.001'x 23.2379
= 1.3074 micron
2 IT? = 161 = 16x 1.3074 = 20.918
+ ITT = 21 microns = 0.021 mms
178 = 251 =28x =
= 0.033mm
damental or upper deviation of shaftLimits, Fits and Gauges
Fundamental or lower deviation of H-hole = 0
Limits for 20H7 = 20°, i ace
and Limits forf, = 20°° 008 29°00
Gauge tolerence for hole gauging’ = 10% work tolerence
= 0.1 x 0.021 mm
= 00021 mm
++ Wear allowance on this gauge = 10% of gauge tolerence
= 0.1x0.0021
= 0.00021mm.
Gauige tolerence for shaft gauging = 0.1 x 0.033
= 0.0033 mm.
‘Wear alloance on this gauge 1 x 0.0033
= 0.00033 mm.
NO-GO”
Gauge tolerence
EE FG,
Wear
atloarce
Wear ‘attoance
60
of shopt= 19.947,
Fig. 3.17
For hole :
UpperlimitofGO gauge = 20+ 0.00021 + 0,002)
= 20,00231mm.
Lower limit ofGO gauge = 20+ 0.00021=20.0002)mm.
+ 9c
w+ Limits of No-GO gauge = 20° °!
Upper limit of NO-GO gauge = 20.021 + 0.0021
= 20.0231mm,
Lower limits of NO-GO gauge = 20,021 mm
232
©. Limits of No-GO gauge = Nea Metrology & Quality Control
For shaft :
Limits of GO gauge
Limits of No- GO gauge
. Distinguish between precision instruments and gauges.
Precision instruments
Gauges
‘These are measuring tools carrying
calibrated scales.
dimensions of parts.
is time consuming, so they are not
suitable for mass production.
These instruments are required to be
handled by skilled workers.
5. Use of the precision instruments in
mass produciton results in increased
cost of part.
‘These are used to measure the, actual
._ Measurement by precision instruments
These are inspection tools without
scales.
These are used to determine whether
the dimensions of part are within the
specified limits.
3. Measurement by gauges is easy
and rapid, so they are suitable in
mass prodaction.
‘The gauges can be easily handled by
unskilled worker.
5. Use of gauges results in reduced
production cost.
Q.26 Draw neat sketches of the various types of Limit Plug Gauges.
Ans, ‘Types of Plug Gauges
1, Solid Type : For sizes up to 10 mm.
Fig, 3.18 Solid Type double-ended plain plag gauge
{Reproduced from IS : 3484)Limits, Fits and Gauges 17
2. Renewable Type (Taper Inserted Type : For sizes over 10 mm and up to 30 mm,
F
Fig. 3.19 Inserted Type Piain Plug Gauge (Reproduced from 1S : 3484)
3. Fastened Type:
Fig. 3.20 Fastened type plain plug gauge (Reproduced from IS : 3484)
(a) Double-ended : For sizes over 30 mm and up to 63 mm.
(b) Single-ended : For sizes over 63 mm and up to 100 mm. (Fig. 3.21).
Fig. 3.21 Fastened type Go and Not-Go plug single ended gauges
(Reproduced from IS : 3484)Ear Metrology & Quality Control
Progressive form of plug gauge
to
res nate
tae de :
Fig. 3.22 A progressive form of plog gauge in which
L= Length of component +3.2 mm
‘Flat Type : For sizes ovei 100 mm and up to 250mm,
4 Fig. 3.23 Fint type Ge and Not-Go plug single ended ganges
(Reproduced from 18:3484)
[PRenewable end type plug gauges
“wet” Maca fae wees
Fig, 3.24 Renewable End Type
ee[Angular Measurements Post |
Chapter ..... 4
ANGULAR MEASUREMENT:
Q.1. Name the various instruments used for measurement of aiigles.
Ans : The various instruments used for measurement of angles are as foitows :-
Bevel protractor, sine bar, mle gouges, spirit lvel, clinomete, ato-cllimator, angle dor,
ete,
Q.2.. What is sine bar? How ig if used for angle measurement?
Ans ; Sine bar is a precision instrument used along with slip [Link] accurate engle
measurments or angle setting. It consists of a'steel bar and two rollers: The bar is made of
high carbon, hgh chromium corrosion resistant
steel, suitably hardened stabilised and precision
ground. The rollers are of accurate and equal
diameters. They are attached to the bar at each
end, The axes of the rollers are parallel to each
other and also to the upper surface of the bar.
‘The nominal distance between the axes is exactly,
Fig. 4.1 100m, 200mm or 300mm. When the rollers are
‘brought in contact with a flat surface, the top of thé bar is parallel to the surface. All the
working faces ofthe bar and cylindrical surfaces of rollers have surface finish of 02 um Ra
value or better.
Top surface
“The use of sine baris based on the laws of
‘geometry and trignometry. To set a given angle,
‘one rroller of the bar is placed on the surface plate
and combination of slips gauges is inserted under
the second roller. If “h” is the height of the
combination of slip gauges and “L” the distance
between the roller centres. Then,= Metrology & Quaiity Control
‘Thus the angle to the measured or to be ser is determined by indirect method as a function
of sine : for this reason, the device used is called sine bar.
Q.3. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of a component.
Ans : i. When component is af smal size :
For checking the angle of a comonent of small size, a sinié bar is set up at nominal
(approximate) angle on a surface plate by suitable
combination of slip gauges. The component to be
checked is placed over the surface of the sine bar as
shown in fig, 4.3 A dial gauge is carried ina surface
_gauge on the surface plateand is moved along the upper
surface of the component. If there is variation in
parallelism of the upper surface of the component and
the surfce piste, itis indicated by the dial gauges. The
combination of the slip gauges is so adjusted that the
upper surface of the component is truly parallel with
the surface plate,
Fig. 4.3
The angle of the component, @ = sin“! (4)
The perfect adjustement of slip gauge combination requires too much time, 0 the variation
inthe parallelism of the upper surface of the component and the surface plate indicated by
the dial gauge is converted into corresponding angular variation. If“dx* is the variation in
parallelism over distance “x the corresponding
variation in angle, gy = gi ,
x
and the approximate ornominal angle, 4 = giq1 (2)
2+ Actual angle of the component = 8 + d0
=F)
|. When component size is large :- The component is placed over a surface plate.
The sine bar is placed over the component
as shown in fig 4.4(2). The heights over
the rollers are measured by means of a
vernier height gauge. A dial gague is used
to check the measuring pressure. If“ is
the difference in theheights and “L’ distance
between the roller centres of the sine bar,
then, oa fh”
o-sn'(2)"Angular Measurements ______ aa:
Another method of determining angle of large
sized part is shown in the fig. 4.4(b). The component
is placed over a surface plate and sine bars set up
al approximate angle on the component so that its
surface is neatly parallel to the surface plate. A dial
gauge is moved along the top surface of the sine
bartonote the variation in parallelism. If“ isheight,
of the combination of the slip gauges and “dh” the
variation in parallelism over distance “L’ then ,
Fig. 4.4 (0), ee sin? (: £ a)
Q.4. Explain why it is not preferred to use sin bar for measuring angles greater
than 45°. .
Ans : The accuracy of the angle set by a sine bar depends upon the errors in its important
dimensions such as error in distance between roller centres,error in combination of slip gauges
used for setting, error in parallelism between the gauging surface and plane of roller axes,
atc,
‘The slip gauge combination_(h) required to set an angle (8) is given by
h=Lsind
The effects of error in spacing of roller centres (4L) or error in combination of slip
gauges(dh). on angular setting accuracy can be obtained by partial differentiation of the
above equations:
h=Lsin®
dh _ ig ak.
ao Oo + :
ae 7 Og + Loose
+. dh = sind dL + Leos 6.48
gh sin. dL
Leos@ ~~ Leosé
= mo th +)
2 d=
Lsind ~ L
But, Lsin@ = h
dh aL
o 9 = tano( -+)
From the above equation we can see that the effect of error in roller spacing or slip gauge
combination is a function of tangent of angle 0 . As the angle 0 increases, the error (d9 ) in
the angular measurement increases and above 45° value it is more significant, because above
45° value of tan @ is greater than unity and increases progressively.Q.5. State the features of sine bar which have toleranes for accuracy.
Ans : Following features of the sine bar have tolerance for accuracy.
1. Upper and lower surfaces ; flatness afd parallelism with respect to datum surface.
2. Side faces : Fletness, squareness to upper surface, squarencess to the axes of rollers.
3. End faces : Flatness, squarencess to upper surface, parallelism to the axes of rollers,
4, Rollers : Straightness, cylindrical accuracy (freedom from lobing, and taper,) mean
diameter,
5. Roller axes: Centre distance, parallelism with cach other, parallelism with upper surface.
Q.6. Name the various factors on which the accuracy of a
Ans : The accuracy of a sine bar depends on the following factors.
1. Equality of size of rollers. :
2 Cylindrical accuracy of rollers.
3. Centre distance of rollers.
4, Paraltetism of roller axes with eath other,
5. Paralletism of roller axes to upper surface of the sine bar.
6, Equality of distance from roller centres to the upper surface,
7. Flatness of upper surface of the bar.
e bar depends.
Q.7. List the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar.
Ans : The different sources of errors in angular measurement by a sine bar are listed below :
1, Error in distance between roller centres.
2. Error in stip gauge combination used for angle setting. :
3. Errorin parallelism between the gauging surface and plane of roller axes.
4, Errors in equality of size of roller and cylindrical accuracy in the form of the rollers.
5, Error in parallelism of roller axes with each other.
6. Ertor on flatness of the upper surface of the bar. :
Q.8. Draw a neat sketch to illustrate the use of a sine bar for measurement of taper
pluge gauge and-explain briefly.
OR :
How you will measure the angle of a taper plug gauge with the help of a sine bar?
Ans : Fig, 4.5 illustrates the use of sine bar for measurement of angle of a taper plug gauge.
‘The sine bar is set up on a surface
SL tte ate plate to the nominal angle of the taper
plug gaugeard clamped to an angle plate.
‘Taper plug gauge is placed on the sine
bar and prevented from sliding down by
astop plate, The axis of the taper plug
Bie ote gnuge is aligned with the bar aixs. A dial
gauge, supported in a stand is set at one“Angular Measurements zy
end of the plug gauge and moved to the other end and the difference in the readings is noted.
Let “dx’ be the difference in the readings of the dial gauge over adistance“X’ Let“h' be |
the height of the combination of the slip gauges used and “L' distance between the roller
centres.
‘Then, nominal angle 6 = sin” ) and variation in the angle,
46 = sin’? )
<. Actual angle of the taper plug gaugue,
= 04 ao = aint (+) it &)
. L
Q.9. A100 mm sine bar is to be set up to-an angle of 33°, Determine the slip gauges
needed from 87 piece set 2
‘Ans + Combination of stip gauges requried to set up an angteis given by,
h = L sind
Where L = distance between roller centres
= 100mm
andg = 33°
h = 100 sin 33° = 54.464 mm
, The minimum number of slip gagues needed to build up 54.464 mm is as follows
1004 - one
1460 = one
2,000 -= one
$0,000 = one
34464 Four
Q.10 Write short notes on i) Vernier Bevel protractor ii) Angle gauges.
Ans : i, Vernier Bevel Protrator :- Bevel protractor is a simplest instrument for measuring
Blade tocking, i “ angle between two faces of parts
such as taper shafts bushing, etc,
Ithas two arms, which can be set
along the faces and a circular scale
to indicate the angle between them,
The accuracy of the instrument is
. increased by the addition of a vernier.
‘The body of the instrument is
{ extended from one of the arms,
Working ede | knownas astock. The other arm
: Body
Mechanca! bovel protractor with Vernier ard acute isin the form gfan adjustable: blade.
angie ctlacnment Fig. 4.64.6 ‘Metrology & Quality Controf
‘The working edge of the stock is about 90mm Jong and 7mm thick and as far as possible
perfecily straight. The bladeis about 150mm or 300mm fong, 13mm wide and 2mm thick. Its
‘ends are bevelled at angles of 45°and 60? within the accuraey of 5 minutes of arc, The blade
rotatesin a turret, mounted on the body and can be clamped in any position by alocking nut.
Either the body or the turret carries a divided circle. (main scale) and other member earries &
vemier or index. The least counts of vernier bevel protractor is 5 minutes,
2, Angle gauges :-In 1941, Dr. Tomlinson devised a set of angle gauges, which enables
any angle to set fo the nearest 3”. These are pieces of hardened and stabitized steel The
mesuring faces-are lapped and polished to a high degree of accuracy and flatness. They are
‘75mm long and 16mm wide and are available in two sets. One set consists of 12 pieces arid a
square block, in three series of values of angle viz. .
1,0, 39, 9°, 27%, and 41? :
1,3, 9 and 2' and
6", 18" and 30"
Another set contains 13 pieces and a square block
19, 3°, 9°, 27° and 41°
U,3,9527' and
3", 6",18" and 30"
Each angle gauge is accurate to within one second and is marked with engraved V which
indicates the direction of the included angle, These gauges, together with square block can be
so wrung that any angle between O° to 360° can be set. Thisis possible because the gauges in
combination can be added or substrated as required (refer fig.4.7) .
‘Those gauges are widely used in engineering
CD) * indusires for quick measurement of angles
between two surfaces, to check angle
A tolerance of work pieces, ete. But the
«te “| ee} ~ Block formed by the combination of
(B4Q) Adtran _ Sbsirecton _ qumber ofthese gauges is rather bulky
Fig.47 | and can-not always be conveniently
applied to work, so they are used as reference along with other angle measuring devices.
[Link] An angle of value'33*- 9°=15" isto be measured with the help of the following
standard arigle gauges (1°; 3%; 9%, 27°, 41°) ,(1', 3', 9°, 27) 3", 6", 18", 30" )
Show the arrangements of angle gauges with a neat sketch by sclecting minimum
number of gauges.
“Ans : Minimum number of angle'gatiges required to
obtain the angle 33°, -9' 15" are as follows.
| P+ 9H HET:
‘The combination of the above gaugesis shown
infig.4.8 “
WERE
CK‘Angular Measurements
Q.12. An angle of value 102 °- 8'- 42 " is to be
measured with the help of standard 13
pieces set of angle, gauges and a square
block, sketch the combination,
Ans : Angle being greater than 90°, it is measured
with the help of square block, So angle to be
set by angle gauges is equal 10 (102°- 8'- 42") -90 = 12-842"
Combination of angle gauges require, +3° +9" 1+ 30" + 18"- 6",
Q.13. What is clinometer ? Describe how it can be used for measurements and setting ?
AMlustrate your answer with sketches ?
Ans : Clinometeris a spirit level mounted on a rotary member carried in a housing.
ier
‘sete
seemoster ey
@)
One face of the housing forms the base of the instrument. On the housing, there is 2
circular scale, The angle of inclination of the rotary member relative to the base can b
ineasured by 2 circular scale. The scale may cover the whole circle or only part of it. (refer’
fig.4.10). (2)
Clinometers are generally used to determine the angle included between two adjac
faces of a. work piece (refer fig.4.10 (b). The bas¢ of the instruments is placed on one of thé
surfaces and rotary member is adjusted till zero reading of the bubble is obtained. The angled
of rotation is noted on the circular scale. The instrument is then palced on other surface and
reading is taken in the same manner.
If @ and 4 are the readings of the instrument, the included angle between the surfaces,
a@ = 180-@x 4)°
Clinometers are also used for checking angular faces and relief angles on large cutting!
tools, for setting tables of jig boring machine, grinding machine for angular work etc.na Metrology & Quality Control
[Link] with the help of neat sketches principles and construction of an
auto-colimator,
‘Ans : Auto-colimatoris an optica instrument
used for the measurement of small angular
differences, changes or deflection, plane
surface inspection, etc. The principle of the
instrument is explained below.
Principle + Ifa light source is placed
in the focus of acollimating lens, itis
projected as a parallel beam of light.
Ie this beam is made to strikea plane
reflector, kept normal to the optical
axis, itis reflected back alongits own
path and is brought to the same focus,
Ifthe reflectors titled through a small
angle "9", the parallel beam is
deflected through twice that angle and
is brought to a focus in the same plane
asthe light source, but to one side at
‘Fig.4.12 Principle of auto-collimator adistance, x=2f9
where £:= focal length of lens
0 = angle of inclination of reflecting mirror.
Construction : In an auto-collimator there are three parts, viz. micrometer microscope,
lighting unit and collimating lens. A line diagram of a tnodemn auto-collimator (injected gre*icule
auto-collimator) is shown in the Fig.5.12:
‘A45° transparent beam splitter reflects the light from the graticule towards the objective
(collimating) lenisés/ The image seen after reflection in the external reflector, whose angular
-variations are being measured is formed by the light from the objective lens. This light passes
through the beard splitter and the image is pick=d up by the microscope. For simultancous
measurements in two planes at right angles < icrometer is fitted to the target graticulo,
optically at right angles to that on the eye piece graticule.
Q.15. Write short notes on :-" (1) Angle dekkor, (2) Optical square.
Ans ¢ 1. Angle dekkor + This is a type of auto-collimator. It consists of a microscope,
“objective (collimating) lens and two scales engraved on a glass screen which is placed in the
PCP ChatwaAtmrTh isRetiected Image of
@ Fig. 4,13 ) ,
{cal plane of the objective lense. One of the scales, called datum scale is horizontal and |
fixed: It is engraved actos the centre of the screen and Is always visible in the microscope
eyepiece. Another scale is an ilhiminated vertical scale which in normal position is outside the ¢
vigw ofthe eye piece and only its reflected image is visible, When an image ofthe illuminated
scale is received at right angles to the fixed scale vertical and horizontal angular displicements
can be simultaneously measured.
‘The sensitivity of this instrument is lower than the other types of auto collimators. But itis 4
widely ised for general angular measurements, In combination with angle gauges itis used to |
measure angle of acomponent, for angular setting of machines,checking slope angles of V- 4
block, to measure angle of taper gauges etc, ;
2. Optical square (penta prism) :- Sometimes it is not
possible to align an auto-colimator 1o obtain a reflection from 7f
the surface to be tested. In such case an Optical square is 3]
often used. q
Optical Squares a constant deviation five sided prism which
reflects rays of Fight through the same angle irrespective of 5
the angle of incidence, The two reflecting surfaces have a
45° icluded angle. In the genteral case of'a contant deviation ||
prism, the ray of light is deflected through twice the angle |
betiveen the relfecting surfaces. So the angle of deflection 2 x 45 "= 90°, The rays of light /|
are, therefore, tuned through 90° without necessarily setting the square precisely in relation i
ht. The acutal angle is not exactly 90%, but the error is only a second or two, The
ion angle of the square is calibrated tothe nearest second.
+ Whenused with an auto-colimator, the optical square enables both the projected and reflected.
beam of rays to be tumed through a right angle without precise setting of the square, This is :
useful in alignment tests involving two surfaces at right angles.Q.16, Explairi how angle of a workpiece or taper plug gauge is measured with the
help of angle dekkor and angle gauges.
Ans: i, Measuring angle of a workpiece : To measure an
se ae angle of component, first the angle gauges combination is set
up to thenominal angle with 10'or 20", Using special attachment
and link,angle dekkoris set to receive the reflection and adjusted
(o obtain zero reading on the illuminated seafe. The angle gauges
| ° are then removed and the workpiece under testis put in place.
ed Ifthe surface of the workpiece is not sufficiently polished, a
7 slip gauge is placed in it 16 forma reflecting surface. Angle
dekkor is again adjusted to receive the reflection. The new
reading of the'teflected scale w..t. the fixed scale gives the
difference between the angle of the component is obtained by
algebraic addition of the reading of the angle dekkor and the nominal angle set wp by the angle _
gauges. :
i argle _li, Mesuring angle of a taper plug gauge : First the
oper slug LOY angle gauges combination is set up to the nominal angle
sane Yy ofthe taper gauge. The instruments adjusted to receive
the reflection and set to gbtain zero reading on the
= iog, illuminated scale. The angle gauges are rermoved and
taper gauge is placed in that position. A slip gauge is
Slip“ gouge held against the cutved surface of the taper gauge. New
Fig. 4.16 reading of the instrument is noted. It indicates the
difference in the included angle of the taper plug gauge and nominal angle set up by the angle
‘gauges. .
[Link] the method of checking the angle of a taper plug using rotlers,
micrometer and slip gauges.
Ans ¢ Fig.4.17 shows the
metod of checking the angle of
a taper plug using rollers,
micrometer and slip gauges.
Taper plugis placed ona
surface plate, First two rollers
of equal diameters are placed
touching on the opposite sides
Fig. 4.17 of the lower surface of the plug
onthe slip gauge combinations of equal heights (H,). The distance (m,) between the ends of
therollersis measured with micrometer. Then the rollers are placed on slip gauge combinations
of heights (H,,) touching on the opposite sides of the top portion of the plug. The disai:
PCH PT bpals avail hs“Angular Measurements
(M,) between the ends of the roller in this new position is again measured by means of
mictometer. The half the taper angle of the plug is then calculated as follows
Ifd = diameter of roller, then
Y = MM
= = Tey
Q.18. While checking angle of piece tapered on one side with the help of two di
slip gauges and diat indicator the following observations were obtained, :-
Diameter of larger disce = 2S mm Diameter of smaller disce = 15mm.
‘The dial indicator shows no variation when traversed along the surface of the
piece placed over the disc. Draw the sketch of the set up and find angle of
taper. . .
From triangle0,A0,
a Y
stan Y=
"7/2 2+ di +
But d, =25 nim, do 41 Sitch end 1 = 40mm,
= 476364 0 = 9.522728
Q.19. Calculate the angle of taper and minimum diameter of an internal taper from
the following redings :
Diameter. of bigger ball . + 10.25 mn,
Diameter of smaller batl........6.07mm.
Height of top of bigger bail from datum ...... 30.13
‘Height of top smaller balt from datum- 10.08.
4, = 10.25 mm, d,=6.07mm, h,*30.13mm, hy= 10.08 mm.
3 OA
BD - 0,B - 0.)* Thy di = 2hy > dh
asin Of 2 — =a
88m Sy ee)
10.25 6.07
. 355
From triangle 0,DE
. OE.
sin Bos oo”
sin6s26 = —— 607-4 od = 443mm
2x 1008 - 6.07
Angle of taper= 13.3652" .
and minimum diameter of tapér = 4.43 mm.
Q.20 Describe with the help of neat sketches
1) Sine Centre . 2) Sine Table
Fig. 4.20 Sine Centre
~ 2(30.13- 10.08) = (1025 - 607)
=F 1 Y = 60826" 0 = 13,3652
:
k
‘
E
:
x
8
s
*
teen
€Due to difficulty of mounting éonical work easily on a conventional sine bar, sine centres,
are used. Two blocks as shown in Fig, 4.20 are mounted on the top of sine bar. These blocks
accomodate centres and ean be clamped at any position on the sine bar. The centres can be
also be adiusted depending on the length of the conical work piece, to be held between centres,
s extremely useful for the testing of conical work, since the centres ensure,
tof thie work piece. The procedure for its setting is the [Link] that for sine |
Tablé.: The sine table [Link] most convenient and accurate design for hevy work
piece. The equipment consists of a self-contained sine bar, hinged af onerollet and mounted
is datum sutface. The table is quite rigid one and the weight of unit and work-piece is
given fuller and safer support. The table may be safely swing to any angle from 0 to 90° by
pivatinigit about its hinged end, Due to the work being held axially between centres, the angle |
jon will be half the included angle of the work. The use of sine centres'and sine table?
provides a convenionit method of measuring the angle of a taper plug gauge:
Fig. 4.21 Sine Table‘Screw Thread Measurements 7 as
Chapter...
SCREW THREAD MEASUREMENT:
Q.1. Define with neat sketches the basic nomenctature of parallel threads.
Ans:
(a) External thread Fig.s.t (b) Internal thread
Crest :Ttis the prominent part of thread i.e. top surface joining the two sides of thread,
Root : Its the bottom of the groove between the sides of two adjacent threads.
Flank : The straight surface between the crest and root of a thread. «
Piteh : The distance measured parallel to the axis from a potet on a thread to the corresponding.
point on the next (adjacent) thread,
Lead : The distance through which a screw thread advances axially in one complete revolution.
Depth of thread : The distance between the crest and the root of a thread measured
perpendicular to the axis of the thread,
Thread angle : Angle included between the flanks or slopes of a thread, measured in an
axial plane.
Flank angle : Angle made by the flank ofa thread-with the pependicular to the thread axis.
tis equal to half the thread angle.
dete Carel se
”
JOS.Metrology & Quality Control
Minor diameter : (Core diameter or root diameter). It is the diameter of an imaginary co-
axial cylinder which would touch the roots of an external thread or crests of an internal
thread.
Major diameter : (External diameter) It is the diameter of an imaginary co-axial cyclinder.
which would touch the crests of an extemal thread or roots of an internal thread.
Effective Diameter : (Pitch diameter) :- It is the diameter of an imaginary co-axial cylinder
which intersects the flanks of the threads such that the widths of the threads (metal) and
widths of the spaces between the threads are equal; each being half the pitch.
Q.2,, What are the various characteristics that youwould measure in a serew thiread?.
Also list the instruments appratus that are required for this,
‘Ans’: The various characteristics or elements that are required to be measured in a screw
‘thread and the instruments or appratus used for the meesurement are listed below.
External thread mesurement :
1, Major diameter : Ordinary micrometer or Bench micrometer,
ii. Minor diameter : Two V-pieces and a floating carriege diameter measuring machine or
optical projector oi microscope.
iii, Simple effective diameter : Thread micrometers, or Ball-point micrometers or wires
(rods) with a micrometer,
iv. Pitch : Pitch measuring machine or screw pitch or profile gauge or micrascope.
¥. Thread angle and form : Either a microscope or an optical projector,
Internal thread measurement :
1. Minor diameter : Using taper parallels using rollers or by thread mesuring machines.
ii, Effective diameter : Using scrow thread micrometer, using measuring machines or
comparator or using cast of the thread,
iii, Major diameter : Using cast of the thread. Once a cast is made, major diameter can
be determined by using microscope or optical projector.
iv. Pitch : Screw pitch or profile gauge, microscope or pitch measuring machine,
¥. Thread angle and Form : Using cast of thread. Once a cast is made eithera microscope
[Link] optical projector. :
Q.3, Descirbe any one method of checking major diameter of an external straight
thread.
Ans : A good quality hand micrometer can be used to measure major diameter of external
threads, but it has deficienées like variation in measuring pressure, pitch errors in its threads,
etc, Therefore for greater accuracy and covenience a bench micrometer is preferred, This
instrument was designed by [Link].
In place of fixed unvil fiducial indicator is used. This ensures constant pressure for all the
measurement. The instrument has a micrometer head with a verniet scale to read to the accuracy
of 0.002 mm. Itis used as comparator in order to avoid pitch errors of micrometer threads,et te
J syn ie
cameos en
io
ted
Ses ot
“ Sony saaring & Teer
onerenet eo Engi
pemene’ 96S wag (Se RAT NANT
MP.Col0n¥, wv vtSai
Fig5.2(b) MW
zero error setting,ete, A calibrated setting cylinder having nearly samo diameter as the major
diameter of the thread to be mesured is used as setting stadard. The setting cylinder is held
between the anvils and readings taken. The cylinder is then replaced by the threaded workpiece
and again the micrometer reading is noted for the same reading ofthe fiducial indicator.
If D = diameter of the setting cylinder.
1 = reading of micrometer on setting cylinder.
R2 & reading of micrometer on screw thread.
then major diameter of serew threaded =D’ (R,-R,)
Measurement is taken at two or three positions to determine the amount of taper and also
atone plane in different angular positions to detect ovality.
Q.4. Briefly give the procedure for measuring accurately the minor diameter of a
“¥? screw thread, Name the instrument used. Illustrate your answer with
sultable sketch.
Ans 1 Minor diameter of a V- screiv thread is measured by comparative method using floating,
cartiage diameter measuring machine and iwo smal! V-pieces. Which make contact with the
root of the thread.
Fig.5.3
V-pieces are made of hardended steel. Their ends have radius jess than the root radius and
included angle less than the thread angle, Floating carriage diameter measuring machine is a
bench micrometer mounted on a carriage which is confined to moveat right angles to the axisMetrology & Quality Control
‘The threaded workpiece is mounted between the centres of the instrument. The V-pieces
are placed on each side of the workpiece with their bases against the anvils of the micrometer
is noted, The threaded workpiece is replaced by astandard reference disc or a plain cylindrical
standard gauge of diameter approximately equal to the minor (core) diameter of the screw to
‘be measured and second reading of the micrometer is taken for the same fiducial reading.
If R1 = micrometer reading on standard cylinder.
R2 = micrometerrending on threaded workpiece.
siolge: Ds =, diameter of the setting (standard) cylinder,
___, thensminor. diameter of thr D+@,R)
Mtg detect the taper and ovality, retidings at various positions are taken.
If the threads are vély Shatp’ or have no radius st the root, the measurement of minor
diameter is done by projecting the thread form on ascreen and comparing it with standards or
making use of microscope.
Q.5. How the effective diameter of a serew thrend is aeasured ?
‘Ans : Effective or pitch diameter of a thread can be measured by using (1) thread micrometer
or Gi) Wires or rods,
1. Thread micrometer method : This method is simple and _]
* fapid. For measuring effective diameter, a thread micrometers,
‘used. This micrometer is similar to ordinary micrometer except
that it has anvils having special contour to suit the end screw
thread formto be checked.
Micrometer anvils are frst fitted into each other and reading
is taken, The anvils are then made to contact the thread to be
checked and second reading is taken. The difference between, ”
the two readings is the e(fective diameter of the thread. In this
5. method, actually the measurement is in between the major
diameter on one side and minor diameter on the other side which gives the effective diameter.
For more accuray a setting gague is used. .
«aa ig, Using wires or rods : This is the most common method of
measuring pitch or effective diameter of thread. ‘The method uses
‘wo or three small diameter (rods) and a floating carriage diameter
measuring machine. The wires are made of hardended steel and
Fig.5.5(a) have high degree of accuracy and finish.
‘Two wire method Wires (rods) of same diameter are placed in the V-grooves on
Lae the opposite sides of the thread. Then the distance over or under
the wires is measured accurately on floating carriage diameter
se measuring machine, The wires may be either held in hand or secured
“mn in the grooves using grease or may be hung through threads on a
FigS.5 (6) stand.
‘Three wire method‘Screw Thread Measurements
AED, = distance over the wires.
D, = distance under the wires,
p= pitch of thread, d= wire diameter and 26 = thread angle.
effective diameter D,=D,+p=D, -C
‘Where P-and C are constants. Their values depend on wire diameter, pitch and thread
angle.
PZ atl - d(cosecd <1)
1.86 p = d =~ for LS.O. metric thread.
.9605 p- 1.1657 ---+ for Whitworth thread
C =2d-p
Q.6. How the major diameter of an internal thread is measured ?
‘Ans : The major diameter of infernal thread is usually measured
with a thread comparator fitted with ball ended stylii ofradius less
Fail than the radius ofthe root of the thread to be mesured, One of the
1° styl is attached to a floating head which is kept in contact with
#1" the spiridle of dial indicator the folating head towards the indicator
is constrained by a spring. >
‘The insturmentis first set on [Link] reference standard
» Fig5.6 having diameter approximtely equal to the major diameter of the
intemal thread to be checked and reading of the dial indicator is noted. Then the floating head
is retracted to engage the tips of the stylii at the root of the under spring pressure. Second
reading of the dial indicator is noted.
If D. = diameter of cylindrical standard
R; = reading of dial indicator on the standard
Rp = reading on thread
‘Then, major diameter of intemal thread = D+ (R,-R,)
Q.7.. What are the pitch errors? Explain brief the causes and effects of pitch errors
in threaded component. ,
‘Ans : The vatious types of pitch-errors and their causes are explined below.
Progressive pitch error : The pitch of the thread may be longer or shorter than it$ némhinal
value but uniform such errors are caused due to (i) incorrect ratio of the linear velocity of too!
and angular velocity of the work.(ii) pitch error in the lead screw of lathe of other machine
used for thread cuting (iii) Use of incorrect gear or gear train between work and lead screw.
Periodie pitch error : Pitch of the thread isnot uniform i.e. increases gradually to a maximum
value, then reduces gradually befow the normal value. This error repeats itself at equal intervals
along the thread. In this case successive portions of the thread length are either longer or
\on Metrology & Quality Control
shorter than the mean value. Such errors are caused ()) when tool work velocity ratio is not
uniform or (ji) ifthe lead screw of machine lacks squarencess in the aboutment so that it
moves forward and backward once in each revolution.
Irregular error or drunkén error : The pitch of the thread is not uniform, It varies in
magnitude over equal fractions of each turn of the thread. These errors have no specific
causes. They may arise due to disturbances in the machine set up, variation in the cutting
properites of material etc.
Effects of pitch error ; This error results in progressive tightening and interferenance on
assembly and increase the strain in the parts on engagement. An ecror in pitch virtually increases
the effective diameter of a bolt or screw, even though it has the same actual effective diameter
as that of one having perfect pitch, and virtually decreases the effective diameter of nut, Soa
perfect bolt having some pitch error will not assemble with a nut of perfect form and pitch
‘without interference and strain, Now if the effective diameter of the nuts increased, retaining
the same pitch, then the assembly will be possible, But this will lead to thiniing of the thread
flanks and consequent weakening of the assembly. For most of the threads the change in pitch
diameter is approximately twice the pitch error.
Q.8. “What is effect of pitch error and thread angle error on effective diameter of
serew ?
‘Ans + Error in pitch virtually increases the effective diameter of a bolt or screw, This can be
undefstood by the following exemple.
Consider a perfet bolt having some error in the pitch, Assume that it has to engage with a
nut of perfect form and pitch. This will not be possible without interference and strain in the
joint, But if the effective diameter of the nut is increased retaining the same pitch, the two
parts can assemble without interference: pitch error has virtually increased the effective
Giameter of bolt, so for perfect engagement (without strain) the effective diameter of the nut
is to be increased. For most of the thread the change in the effective diameter is twice the
pitch error,
Similarly the vitual effective diameter «fa nut is decreased by the error in pitch. Therefore
if a screw of perfect form and pitch is to be enganged without interference with a nut of
perfect form having some error in pitch the effective diameter of screw is to be reduced.
‘The effect of both longer and shorter pitchis same, each reducing the clearance or increasing
the interference between the meshing threads. Even if the error in pitch is not uniform the
effect would be the seme. 1
‘The effect of error in the thread angle is same as that of the error in the pitch, Thread angle
error also increases or decreases the effective diameter of screw or nut. If d.@, and
462 are the errors in degrees in the angles on the two flanks of thread, the change in the
effective diameter of the thread is given by,
0.0115 p (0, - 40)
where p = nominal pitch,‘Screw Thread Measurements Eee
Q.9. What do you understand by “Best ’ wire? Por M,16X 2 external thread
calcutate the diameter of best size wire and difference between the size under
the wires and effective diameter,
Ans : Best size wire is a wire of such diameter that it makes contact with the flanks of a
thread of effective diameter or pitch line. While making measuremeuts of effective diameter
by wire method if best size wire is used any error in the measurement due to:error in the
thread form or thread angle is minimised.
Diameter of best size wire is given by,
Db = #008
Where, p= pitch of thread. :
9 half thread angle or flank angle,
ForM16x 2 extemal thread, pitch, p=2mm and and 9 = 30°
z, diameter of best size wire.
x sec30° = 1.1547mm
‘The difference between the size under the wires and effective diameter.
P= 0.866 p- d=0,866x2-1.1547
0.5773mm.
Q.10, Write a short note on
Tool Maker’s Microscope :
‘Ans : This is a versatile instrument based on optical means, It consists of a:heavy hollow
base accomodating the illuminating unit undemeath. Work table is mounted on the base of the
instrument on cross slides and is equipped with accurate micrometer screws to move it in two
mutually perpendicular directions in the horizontal plane i.e. longitudinal and lateral directions,
eyepiece
‘supporting
Table
Loterat
Micrometer"
‘screw
tongitudina!
‘miciometer screw
Pra CATE
moe
ssHoey & Quatty Contra]
Optical head is mounted on a vertical column and can be moved up or down and focussed
over the work. To clamp the optical head at any desired position a clamping screwis provided,
‘Work piece is mounted on a glass plate placed on the table. A ray of light from alamp is
collimated and then reflected as a parallel beam by the prism at the end of the tube connecting
the lamp to the centre of the instrument. It then passes through the glass tube. The shadow
image of the outline or contour of the work piece passes through the objective of the optical
hhead and is projected by a system of three prisms to 2 ground glass screen. Observations are
made through an eyepiece. Measurements are made by means of cross lines engraved on the
glass screen, The screen can be'rotated through 360° and the angle of rotation can be read
through an auxiliary eye piece provided on the optical head.
Applications : The following are the applications of tool maker's microscope.
i Measurement of length in rectangualar and polar co-ordinates.
i’ Mesuring tool angles, milling cutter angles, thread angles-etc,:
‘i, Comparing thread forms with standard profites.
iv. Checking contours.
+ Determining the relative position of various points on work.
Q.11, Explain the principle, of operation, construction, worldng and and uses of an
ontical projector.
dans : Optical Projestor Optical compartors which make use of the enlarged image
principle are commonly knows as optical projectors use:
“The optical projector is used for checking the shape or profile ofa relatively sal engineering
coriponents with an accurate standard or drawing. St eriables 4 magnified image of part of.
component to be projected on to a screen where it is compared with an enlarged profile
drawing. The degree of magnification available rhay range from $ to 100.
Prineiple of working : The essential elements of an optical projector are shown
diagrametically in fig. 5.8. Light from the lamp L passes first through a condenser tens C and
then thra”a projection lens p. The component supported on the work table betwees these two
lenses, interrupts the light and causes an in ‘erted magnified image to appear on the screen.
Commercial Projectors : A commercial projector is shown in Fig. 5.9. Its principles the
same as described above, construction :‘Screw Thread Measurements Fa
It consists of:
iA projector (having a light source, a condenser or collmating lens system to diréct the
light past the part and into the optical system)
Suitable work holding table which may be fixed or movable,
Projection optics including both mirrors and lenses.
iv, Screen where the image of workpiece is projected and where measurements of
‘comparisons are made,
¥. Measruing devices. A good optical projector must have a precise optical system, and
means for preceise mechanical measurement.
- ‘When an object is placed before alight
source, shadow of the profile is projected
at some enlarged scale on a screen where
itis compared to a master chart drawing,
‘To reduce the thermal effects an extra
arrangement for water lenses is generally
provided. The magnification is usually from.
510 100 The light source may be atungsten
lamp, fillament lamp or High pressure
mercurcy‘or zenon are lamp, A strong
‘beam of light consisting of paratlel light
- rays is produced by optical means. Bean
Fig.5.9. Optical projector of light should be of large enough diameter
to provide coverage on the test piece and adequate illumination intensity for projecting surface
characteristics,
‘The object to be tested is placed on the work table. The work table may be either stationary
‘or moving type. Some tables are also equipped with an angular adjustment for positioning to
the helix of threads and worms. These tables usually have in and out movement parallel to the
axis of the beam for focussing purposes; and also provision for movements in other two.
planes, Micrometets it comibiriationt with dial indiacators are fitted as measuring attachments
for either two or three directions:
‘The light beam-after passing thie object to be projected passes into the projection system.
having lenses atid miirFors ¢vhich mus{ be beld in accurate alignement on rigid supports. The
lenses are used to obtain the desired magnification and mirrors to direct the beam of tight on
screen. The screens are usually made of glass with the surface facing the operator ground to
very fine grade,
Q.12, Explain the constraction and working of a pitch measuring machine.
Ans : The screw pitch messuring machitie is used to measure the pitch error of individual
threads accurately. It eriploys various stylus points to suit the screw threads that are to be
checked. The screw under measurement is held stationary between centres on the machine.
Re
(Nal Amy ns
ence?Metrology &
The indicator unit, carrying the stylus which bears on the flanks of each thread successively,
is carried on aslide which is mounted on balls, The sfide is actuated by means of a micrometer.
“The act of rotating the micrometer spindle causes the slide to move in relation to the work
being measured, The stylus which is mounted on a leaf spring, falls in and out of each thread,
the pointer of the indicator reads 2e70 (itis adjusted to read zera inthe frst groove) when this
stylus isin a central position in each successive thread, The micrometer reading is taken each
time the indicator reads zero, these readings then show the pitch error of each thread-of the
sorew that is being mesured. Special graduated dises are provided to fit the micrometer to suit,
all ordinary pitches whilst special pitches can be provided for.
Fig. 8.10 Pitch Measuring Macine
The sinall hand wheel below the micrometer screw serves the purpose of moving the
indicator in relation to the slide so as to bring the stylus opposite to the screw to be tested in
any position between centres, The total travel of the micrometer is 25 mm,
‘The pitch errors extremely small, being of the order of 0.002 mm for a thread. A test
serew is also supplied with the machine and a chart of pitch error for this screw.
Q.13. Describe the procedure for measuring the pitch of the initernal threads by means.
of a pitch measuring machine. .
- Ans t The pitch of-an internal thread
t . can be measured on any of the
8 ; crck standard pitch mesuring machine by
< using an adaptor, This adapter carries
"i a bar which can be inserted into the
4 = ring, the stylus being fitted to the bar
lll | E. end engaging with the thread in the
a : usual manner. The ring gauge is
@ Sylus ‘mounted ona face plate or on the liead
Q Ra tli ass ieamanat opose SOCK FE machine, which will
Tapa “ . post accomodate rings upto several c.m in
M Locking screw for Q. diameter for very large rings, a special
T Ingato pointer which is cranged to read zero while set upon a surface plate is necessary,
taking micrometer reading. Lup ona surta a
Fig. 5. iL Measurement of pitch of internal threads utilising an indicator and stip gauges.‘Screw Thread Measurements
Qa4. Explain the construction and operation of a screw thread micrometer,
Fig. 5.12.
Screw Threaded Micrometer,
the vee of the anvil micormeter reads zero. A setting gauge is also provided to remove zero
error if any. Different seis of anvils are provided for different type of therads and the eontact
points of micrometers are so designed that some allowance for thread clearance, is always
made.
‘Ans : The screw thread micrometer is just like
an ordinary micrometer withthe difference that
itis equipped with aspecial anvil and spind’e.
‘The anvil has an intemal vee which fits over
the thread. the end of the spindle of a thread
micrometer is pointed to 60° cone for American
standard threads and an accurate 60°V is
grooved in the anvil. The anvil is ffee 10 rotate.
‘Thus vee of the anvil can adjustitself to the
‘helix angle of the throad being measured: Wheit
the conical spindle is brought into contact with
Q.15 Explain the construction and operation of a tangent micrometer.
Ans, A tangent micrometer is provided with flanked anvils, It essentially consists of a fixed
anvil and a movable anvil. There is a micrometer onthe moving anvil side and thishasa very
limited movement on eithet side of the setting, The [Link] adjusted by setting the fixed
anvil at a desired placed with the help of locking ring and setting tubes. It is also called as
David Brown Tangent comparator. Itis used to compare the thread paramefer with the standard
dimension, 1tis also used for checking gear tooth parameters.
oweison 19
‘GAUGE BLOCKS hid
Fig. 5.13 David Brown Tangent Comparator
Enaunnmrins
ueCOMPARATORS
Qu, Whatis a comparator ?-How they are classified Enumerate the various uses of
comparator.?
Ans ;, Comparator is an instrument used to'compare linear dimension of gauges and work .
pieces with working standards such as slip gauges, Itindicates the difference in sizes between
the working stndard and work piece being measuied, This difference is magnified by some
‘means and indicated on a calibrated dial by some form of pointer. The magnification varies
between 2000 to 40, 000.
Classification : Depending on the method used to magnify and record the variations in the
dimensions of standard and work piece being messured,comparators are classified as follows:
1. Mechanical comparators, 2. Electrical comparators, 3. Optical comparators,
4. Electronic comparators, 5. Pneumatic compatators, 6. Fluid comparators,
7, Combinations of the above,
Uses:
1. To check the components and newly purchased gauges.
2, As laboratory standards to set working or inspection gauges.
3. As working gauge in importent stages of manufacture.
4, Asa {final inspection gauge.
Q.2. Deseribe the-esential characteristics of compa:
fundamental requirements of comparator?
Ans 3 *
1. Robust design and construction : The design and construction of the instrument
should be robust so that it can withstand the. effects of ordinary uses without affesting is
‘measuring sccuracy.
2, Linear charactevisties of scale : Recording or measuring scale should be linear and
uniform (straight line characteristic )and its indications should be clear,
3, High magnification : The magnification ofthe instrument should be such that a smallest
deviation in size of component can be easily detected,
lor OR What are the6
rious uses of
ges and work.
sizes between
fied by some
fication varies
ations in the:
hat are the
ve instrument
taffecting its
be linear and
that a smallest
44. Quiekin results: The indicating system shouldbe such thatthe readings are obtained
inleast possible time.
S. Versatility ; Instrument should be so designed that it can be used for wide range of
measurement.
‘6, Measuring plunger should have the hardened steel or diamond contact to minimise
‘wear and contact pressure should be low and tiniform.
7. The pointer should come rapidly to rest and shoutd be free from oscillations.
8, System should be free from back lash and unnecessary friction avid it should have
minimum inertia,
9. Indicator should be provided with maximum compensation for temperature effects,
[Link] should return to its initial zero position every time:
Q.3. State the principle of working of mechanical comparator, electrical comparator,
optical comparator and pneumatic comparator ?
Ans ::1/Mechanical comparators : The miagnification of plunger movement cnn be obtained
by mechanical means such as levers, gear and pinion arrangement or other mechanical means,
2, Electrical comparators : These instruments are based on the theory of Wheatstone
A.C. bridge. When the bridge is electrically balanéed,no current wilt fiow through the
galvanometer connected to the bridge and pointer will not deflect. Any’ apeet in isductances
of the arms will produce unbalance and cause deflection of the poiriter.
3. Optical comparators : Operating principle ofthis type, of cotmpuirdter is based on the
laws of light reflection and refraciion. Magnification system depends on the filthig ofa mirror,
which deflects a beam of light, thus providing an opticaf lever. -
4, Pneumatic comparators : These instruments utilise the variations it the air pressure
or velocity as an amplifying medium, A jet ot jets of eir are applied 0 the surface being
measured and the variations in the back pressure or velocity of air catwsd due to variations in
size are used to amplify the output signals.
QLs. “What are the ndvastazes and disadvantages of mechanical comparators?
Ans ; Advantages :
i Compact and robust contruction,
“They are portable and cheaper.
‘They are easy to haridle and can be set quickly.
ix. Sceleis linear or uniform,
¥. They are independent of any external power supply, So the accuracy of the readings is
not affected by the variations in the power supply.
Diswévantages :
i. More number of moving parts, so friction and wearis more and accuracy is less,
i. ‘Stackness in moving parts reduces the accuracy of the instrument.
iii. IMertia of moving parts makes the instrument sensitive to variations.
jim: HRamge-of the instrument is limtied by the range of the fixed stele.
¥. Parallax errors are introduced as the pointer moves over a fixed scale,
EP Aaunsr mri ns
~
~
~Q.S. Describe in brief construction and working of a mechanical comparator.
Ans : Johansson “Mikrokator’ is a methanical comparators having magnification of about
$000. It works on the principle of a button spinning on aloop of string.
Johansson “Mikrokator” : The insirument consists of a plunger, twised thin metal strip,
spring elbow, pointer, etc: A very light glass pointer is attached to the centre of the twiested
strip. The two halves of the strip from the centre are twisted in opposite directions,so that any
pull in the strip causes the centre and hence the pointer-to rotate.
Twisted stip inter
Cantilever
strip
ota
Tovey SETI eibow
Phang
Fig. 6.1
‘One end of the strip is fixed to an adjustable cantilever strip and other end is attached to an
arm of spring elbow. The measuring plunger is mounted on'a flexible diaphram, Its inner end
is attached to the other army of spring elbow. Thus the vertical movement of the plunger is
transmitted to the metal strip through the elbow. Any vertical movement of the plunger will
rakeit to twist or untwist ‘This wil easuse the pointer to rotate by an amount proportional to.
the change in the length of the strip.
Magnification of the instrument depends upon the length, width and number of twists of the
twisted strip. It can be varied by changing the tength of the strip with the screws provided on
adjustable cantilever strip,
Q.6. State requirements of good dial indicator ?
‘Ans: 1, Design and construcion must be robust so that it can givé trouble free aid dependable
readings over a fong period without attention.
2. Pointer movement should be property damped so that it will not oscillate when readings
are being taken.3.
4
5.
6
1.
Q.7.
Ans?
awN
mans
»
‘Gls
2
Metrology & Quality Control
To avoid damage fo the instrument, movéments of plunger argerthan the specified
amount on the scale should be controlled by some means.”
The instrument should be useful forthe movement ofthe messing plunger in cithet
direction without affecting the accuracy,
‘The pointer movementon ihe dial (Scale) should be such so indicate the direction of
movement of the measuring plunger.
Accuracy of readings should be laid down to close limits for various sizes and ranges
of instruments.
Operating pressure required on measuring head to obtain zero reading must remain
constant over whole range, é
Enumerate the various advantages of diat' indicator?
2-1, The instrument can be easily used and read even by unskilled worker,
‘Contact presstite is low and uniform,
M1is not subjected 10 problems such as gauge wear, temperature variations, etc.
Itis best suited in mass production for précision dimensional control.
It can detect small dimensional variations that are beyond the range of conventional
gauges.
‘The instrument is accurate and economical.
It is versatile i.e. cen be easily and rapidly used for different types of precision
measurements 6. testing roundess, taper ete.
It is portable,easy to handle and can be set very quickly.
Wirte short notes on :4, Dial indiestor, i. Sigma comparator,
4 Ans: 1. Dial indieator :- Dial indicator’
Piatt __. is a small indicating device using
mechanical infeans such as gears, pinions
for magnification, The usual magnigication
Gear (63) is about 250 to 1000,
(oi sic ‘Heonsists of a plimger which stides in
‘oringtM) bearing and carries a rack at its nner end.
PeiontP, \ ‘The rackmeshes witha pinion. (,) whieh
drives another gears and pinions.
‘The plunger is kept in its normal
extended position by means of alight coil
ait spring. The linear movement of the
plunger is magnified by the gear rain and
‘ranémitted to the pointer on the dial scale.
Fig-6.2 ‘The pointer is mounted on the spindle of
Pinont)
Rock guide
Pinion (p,). To take up the back fash, a light hair spring (1) is attached to the gear (G,)of the
gear train,
Paw A Ae
Trent.Comparators
Dial indicators arg compact and robust in construction, They are protable, easy to handle
and can be set very quickly. They are used for inspection of small precision machined parts,
‘esting alignment, roundeness, parallelism of work pieces, efc. But these insturments have
following drawbacks:-
i. “ Wear of plunger bearing surfaces, year bearing points etc, cause an error in the
measurement,
fi, Accuracy of the instrument is reduced due to backlash in rack and pinion or gear train.
iil, As the plunger moves inside, tite contact pressure of the plunger increases, The variation.
in the plunger contact also introduces error in the measurement,
Sigma comparator : This is améchanical comparator providing magnification in the range of
300 to 5000. It consists of ¢ plunger mounted on two steel strings (slit diaphrams). This provides
a frictioniess linear movement for the plunger. The pluner carries a knife edge, which bears
upon the face of the moving block of a cross-strip hinge. The cross-strip hinge is formed by
pieces of flat steel springs arranged at right angles and is a very efficient pivot for smaller
angular movements, The moving block carries a light metal ¥-forked arms, A thin phosphor
bronze ribbon is fastened to the ends of the forked arms and wrapped around a small drum,
mounted on aspindle carrying the pointer,
sit.
keite = diophirem
eum of : | [sit
reaus'r! ew step ~, daphram
tinge
Fig. 6:3
Any vertical displacement of measuring plunger and hence that of the knife edge makes
the moving block of the cross-strip hinge to pivot. This causes the rotation of the Y-arms. The
‘metallic band attached to the arms makes the driving drum and hence the pointer to rotate.
‘The ratio of the effective length (L) of the arm and the distence (2) of the knife edge from
the pivot gives the first stage magnification and the ratio of pointer length(L) and radius(r).of
the driving drum gives second stage magnification of the instrument, Total magnification of
‘the instrument is thus (L/a.x//t), The magnification of the instrument can be varied by changing
the distance(e) of knife edge by lightening or slackening of the adjusting screws.“Metrology & Quality Conirot
Q.9. State the advantages and limitations of an electric comparator. ?
Ans : Advantages :
‘Stati and compect size,
‘Small number of moving parts hence less friction and wear,
Tt has wide range of magnification.
1. Tie mechanism carrying the pointer being very lightis not sensitive to vibrations.
«Operation tie instrument on A.C, supply reduces Sliding fiction errors due to exec
vibfations
vi, Instement can be easily set up in variety of positions and cen be easily operated,
vit, Indicatig instrument need not be placed close to the measuring wnt,
Limitations or disadvantages :
i Fluctuations inthe vollage or frequency of the elesttc supply wiay effet the results,
ii, Heating of coils in the measuring unit may cause zero drift and alter the calibations.
i, ‘When mesuring unit is remote from the indicating unit, reliability is lower.
».Costis generally more than mechanical comparator.
Distinguish between:- Mechanical comparator and [Link]. ?
‘Mechanical comparators
Electrical comparators
1. Small number of moving parts, hence
less friction and wear and accuracy
ismore.
.2. Fluctutions in the voltage or frequency
‘of the clectirc power supply may affect
the results and accuracy of measurement.
1. Morenumber of moving parts, so
friction and wear is more, and
accuracy is less,
2, They are independant of any extemal
power supply, so accuracy of the
readings is not affected by the variations
in the power supply. F
3.. These iniruments are portable and 3, Messruing and indicating units being
cheaper. seperate and as they require supply they
are not so easily portble and also cost is
4. The mechanism carrying the pointer being
very lingt is not sensitive to vibrations,
5. Ithas wide range ‘of magnification,
4, Inertia of moving parts makes the —
‘instrument sensitive to vibrations.
5. Range of the instrument is limited
by the range of the fixed scale.
F
|Q.11. What are advantages and disdvanges-of pneumatic comparators ?
Py SF AE EEii, As there isno physical contact between gauging member and the part to be measured,
no wear of gauging member or parts and accuracy is more.
{il Absence of friction and less inertia,s0 accuracy is more.
iv. Asitis independant of operator skill, stability and reliability is more.
v. Itean be used to measure diameters, length, squareness, parallelism concentricity,
roundness and other geomettic conditions.
i. Gauging pressures can be adjusted to prevent deflection of paris being measured.
‘Best suited for checking multipte dimensions and conditions on-a part in least possible ,
time,
vii, Jet of eichelps in cleaning dirt nd dust, so accuracy is more,
ix, Indicating instrument can be placed away from the measuring unit.
Disadvantages : .
i. Scale is generally not uniform.
i. Trignot easily portable as it requires elaborate auxiliary ‘equipment such as accurate
pressrure regulator, etc. -
iii, Low speed of response. :
‘iv. Needs differént types of measuring heads for different dimensions.
Q.11, Describe with neat sketch the construction and working of Solex Pneumatic
comparator ? :
It consists of a vertical metal cylinder filled with water upto a certain level and a dip tube
immersed into itupto a depth corresponding to the sir pressure required, A calibrated manometer
tube is connected between the cylinder and control orifice as shown if the fig. 6.4
Ifthe pressure of the air supplied is higher than the desired pressure, some air will bubble\centricity,
asured,
ast possible ,
ns accurate
-Ttuses a
adip tube
tanometer
ill bubble
Metrology & Quality Control
‘out from the bottom of the dip tube'and air moving to the control volume will be at the desired
constant pressure, The constant pressure air. then- passes, through the control orifice and
escapes ‘form the measuring jets. When there is no restriction to the escape of air,the level of
water in the manometer tube will coincide with that in the cylinder. Bur, ifthere is arestriction
tothe escape of air through the jets, a back pressure will be induced in the circuit and level of
water in the tanometer tube will fal. The réstriction to the escape of air depends upon the
‘variations in the dimensions to be measured. Thws the variation in the dimensions to bemeasured.
are converted into corresponding pressure variations, which can be read from the calibrated
scale provided with the manometer.
Q.12, Due to which characteristics air gauazing bas ropldly inerensed sed In mass
production gauging?
‘Ans : Air gatiging has-rapidly increased use in'mass production gauging because of the
following advantages possessed by itover other methods,
Refer Q. (10)
Q.13, What is the basic difference between a measuring instrament and a comparator?
Define sensitivity in both the cases. 7
‘Ans Ameasuring instrament indicates the actual value of the quantity being measured while
4 comparator indicstes the difference in the sizes between the working standard and the
work piece being measured.
Sensitivity ofa measuring instrument foraspecified value of quantity measured i expressed
as the ratio of the increment of the observed variable and the corresponding increment of the
‘quantity measured, Sensitivity of a comparator can be defined as the rate of displacement of
the indicating device wit. the diference in the sizes of working standard and work pioce
being measured. s
Q.14. What is the basie difference between a guage nnd a comparator ?
‘Ans: A gaugeis an inspection tool used to check dimensions, form, etc, and to define whether
the deviations from the actual dimensions or form of part ere within the specified limits;
Whereas a comparator is used 10 compare linear dimension of work piece with standards
such as slip-gauges. Comparator indicates the difference in'sizes between the standard and
the work piece being measured, while guage determines whether the manufactured part ties
between the given limits of size.
What are the merits and demerits of optical comparator ?
Merits : .
Very few moving parts, hence less friciton, wear and hence higher accuracy.
Scale can be moved past a datum line and so have high range and no parallax errors.
Very high magnification, so, suitable for precision measurements,
iv, Since sealeis illuminated, it enables readings to be taken irrespective of room lighting,
conditions,
PEELE
=
s
5
g
~
w
el
xDemerits :
i, . As the magnification is high,heat from the lamp, transformers, etc. may cause the
Setting to-drif.
Depends on externat electrical power supply.
Apparatus is usually bully. and expensive,
"When scale is projected on‘asereen; the instrument is 1obe used in dark room.
t-“Ynstrument is inconvenient for continuous use, because the Scale isto beviewéd through
eye piece. ‘ *
:16-Explain the principle of optical lever with the help af a neat sketch. Brawa
“©, figure showing general system of optical comparator 2-0 &
)peratingprincipte of optical comparator is based on the laws of light reflection and
eftaction. Optical magnification system depends on the tilting of a mirror which deflects a
beam of ight thos providing an optical lever. The following igure ilustratethe principle of
optical lever.
‘According to the law of reflection, the angles of incidence and reflection are equl. “do
the total angle of the beam deflection is increased by 240, thus giving automatic magnificatioa.p.17) Differentiate between.
i. Comparator and messuring instrument, ii. Comparator and gauge. ?
Metrology & Quality Control
1. Itis used to compare dimensions of
parts with working standards and to
measure difference between the sizes
of parts and working standards.
2, The reading are magnified by suitable
arrangements,
3, Measurements can be done rapidly and
accurately, so itis suitable in mass
production.
4, Can be used to check dimensions as
well as geometric forms,
$, No chances of errors due to incorrect
contant pressure or deformation of |
avork pice,
6 Accracy is independant of correct
feel or operator skill
1. Iisused to measure the actual dimensions
Measuring Instrument
of the manufactured parts.
2, ‘No magnification system is provided.
3. Measurements is time consuming sonot
suiteble in mass production,
4, Cannot be used'to check geometric forms.
5, Errors are caused due to misalignment of |
instrument or work piece, incorrect contact
preseure and deformation of'nstrument of
workpiéee.
6, Accuracy depends on the correct feel and
operator skill. : :
1. Used to compare the dimensions of
parts with working standards,
2, Determines the difference between
the sizes of part and standard,
3, Magnification and indicating systems
tire provided,
4, Less wear or even no wear as in
case of electrical, optical comparators
|. Can be used to compare dimensions
of larger and thin walled parts.
Gauge
Used to determine whether the dimensions
of partlie within the given limits of size.
2, Determines deviation from the actual
dimensions or form of part.
3. No magnification and indicating systems
are provided.
4, Surface of GO gauge wears during
continuous use.
5. Can not be used to gauge the dimensions
of larger and thin walled parts,
8. Explain the construction and operation of a reed type mechanical comparator?
s : Reed Type mechanical Comparator :- In reed type mechanical comparator, the
ging head is usually a sesitive, high quality, dial indicator. The dial indicator is mounted or.
base supported by a stardy column, Fig, 6.6 shows a reed type mechanical comparator.‘The reed mechanism is frictionless device
for magnifying small motions of the spindle,
It consists of a fixed block‘A' which is rigidly
fastened to the gauge head case, and floating
block B, which carries the gauging spindlé
and is connected horizontally to the fixed
block by reed C:
A vertical reed is attached to each block
with upper ends joined together.
‘These vertical reeds are indicated by D,
| Beyond this joint extends a pointer,
A linear motion of spindle moves the free
block vertically causing the vertical reed on
the floating block to slide past the vertical
Teed on the fixed block, However, as the
vertical reads are joined at the upper end,
instead of slipping, the movement causes
both reads swing through at arc and as the
target is merely an extension of the vertical
. reeds, it swinigs throgh a much wider arc,
Fig. 66 The amount of target swing is proportional
~ Reed type mechanical-Comparator to the distance the floating block has moved
but of course very much magnified.” ° -
‘The scale may be calibrated by means of geuge block (slip gauges ) to indicate any deviation.
~ from an initia setting, “
‘The mechanical magnification is usually less than 100, but itis multiplied by the éptical lens
system. It is available in amplifications ranging from X $00 tox 1000
Q.19 (a) Nate the two types of diat itidicatars, .
() Draw a simple diagram of a phinger type dial indieator indicating the values of
(1) read division on the main scale (2) ench- division on the revolution counter seale
Ans. The two distinct types of dial indicators are
1, Plunger type (with linear moving plunger)
2. Lever type(with an angular snoving stylus)
(b) Fig, 6.7 shows a plunger type dial test indicator (i) The vatue of each division on the mai
circular scale is 0.01 mm.
Gi) The value of each division on the revéluion counter is Imm,Metrology & Quality Contrat
ss cue Pao
Fig. 6.7 Plunger Type Dial
Q.20 With the help of a neat sketch. Explain the working of a lever type dial indicator,
Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator.
Ans. Fig. 6.8 shows a lever typedial indicator. In this type the plunger is replaced by a ball
lipped lever arm which is pivoted on the body of the indicator. The ball-tippped portion is
called stylus. . :
keer Return spring
Fig. 6.8 Leyer Type Dial Indicator
‘The movement of the lever is such that itis at right angles to the main scale. Fig. 6.8 shows”
the mechaniém of the lever type dial indicator, It relies upon a lever, which is pivoted at its
lower end. A ball at the upper end of the main lever rotates the scroll and this movement is
displayed by the pointer on the main scale.
Ithas only a limited range (limited by the scroll length), which usually allows about’) 1/2
revolutions of the pointer to be made. It is for this reason that a revolution counter is not
provided in this type of dial indicator.
Uses : This instrument is more compact than the plunger typé and it is most commonly
used for both inspection and machine setting. With the ball tip placed inside a small bore,
concentricity, roundness or machine setting can be conveniently checked.
1
Eo MPeRaE YE FE AU IEE ETE
[coca‘Surface Finish Measunnents ==
Chapter vue
SURFACE FINISH MEASURMENTS
Q.1. What'are the different inodes of defining surface texture ? i
‘Ans : Onany finished surface imperfections or iegularites are bound to_be there. They are !
inthe form of sucpession ofhills and valleys which vary bothin height and its spacing, depending '
upon the production process or manufacturing process used. I
Surface irregularities superimposed on a plane, i
Lvsvines curved or wavy base portion of asurfaceis called |
‘Miot surface texture. There are two modes of defining
. surface-texture, viz primary texture and secondary
Fig.7.a texture, : i
i. Primary texture (roughriess) # The surface irtegularities of small wave length are )
called primary texture or roughness. These are caused by direct action of the cutting element
on the material ic. cutting tool shape, tool feed rate or by some other disturbances suchas. *
friction, wear or corrosion. These irregularities constitute micto-geometrical errors, The }
evaluation of surface finish is based on the height and character of the microgeometrical
irregularities. :
fi. Secondary texture (Wavyness) :- The surface irregularities of considerable wave :
length of & petiddic chatdelét aré called scednidary tExtité SF WHYHES. THESE IFS USA
result due to inaccuracies of slides, wear of guides, misalignment of centres,non-linear feed
motion, deformation of work under the action of cutting forces, vibrations of any kind, ete.
‘These errors are macro-geometrical errors, Roughness (primary texture) is superimposed
upon the secondary texture (waviness).
Q.2. Deseribe with a neat sketch construction and working of an instrument used
for measurement of surface texture.
Ans : Comparatively cheap and reliable instrument using mechanical cum optical means of
magnification was designed by Dr. Toralinson (Refer Fig.7.2)
The instrument consists ofa diamond probe (stylus) held by spring pressure aganist the‘Motrotogy & Quality Control
surface of a lapped cylinder by aleaf spring. The lapped cylinder is supported on one side by -
line probe and on the other side by fixed rollers. A light spring steel arm is attached to the
lapped cylinder. It carries atits tip a diamond scriber which rests against a smoked glass. The
“L diemane
topped
eylinaée
For tiesuring surface finish the body of the instrument is moved across the surface by
screw and motor arrangement! The vertical movement of the probe caused by surface
itregularities makes the horizontal lapped cylinder to roll. This causes the movement of the
{J arm attached to the lapped cyliner. A magnified vertical movement of the diamond scriber on
[smoked glass is obtained by the movément of the arm. This vertical movement of the scriber
together with horizontal movement produces a race on the smoked glass plate. [Link] is
further magnified st X 50 orx 100 by an optical projector.
'Q.3. What are roughness coniparison specimens? How they assess surface
roughness? What are the limitations ?
‘Ans : The roughness compatison Specimens are either Nat or segmented cylindrical pieces
having inown roughness value: They are used for qualitative assessiment of surface roiighness
‘of a finished product by comparison materials such as steel having hardness of about 400 , :
nickel alloy or metdlised plastics. They afe rigidly supported on abaseto ‘prevent warping or i
distortion during use.
‘The assessment of surface roughness of a finished product is done by comparison with the
specimen of known roughness value and finished by machining process similar to that of the
product under test. The comparison may be dene by visual inspection,or touch inspection. In __
visual inspection, the product and the specimen are seen simultaneously and the roughness of
the product is compared with that of the specimen by naked eye. In touch inspection, the feel
of the surface is experienced by moving finger nail lightly across the lay of the roughness of‘Surface Finish Measurments: 3 |
the product to be tested and afterwards moving across the surface of the specimen of known
- roughness value, Then the two feels are compaed to assess the surface roughness of the
product, ~
‘Though the methods of assessment of surface roughsiass by using speicmens of known
roughness value are repid, they are not reliable because visual inspection by naked eye is
always likely to be misleading especially when the surfaces to be tested have high degree of.
finish, Touch inspection can not give reliable results and can not detect minute flaws, uiless
the person is very well trained. Also the results obtained by comparison vary from person to
person. Erfors may also be caused dueto difference in the material, shape, mechod of machining,
‘method of finish, etc, of product and the specimen,
Q.4.. Explain the principle, general construction'and operation of stylus type surface
texture measuring instruments, What are the disadvantages of these types of
instruments ? why are they widely used ?
Ans : If. finely pointed probe or stylus be moved over the surface of a work piece, the
vertical movement of the stylus caused due to the irregularities in the surface texture can be
used 10 astess the surface finish of the work piece,
Stylus which isa fine point made of diamond or any such hard material is drawn over the
surface to be tested. The movements of the stylus ere used to modulate a high frequency
carrier cursent or to generate a voltage signal. The output is then amplified by suitable means
and used to operate a recording or indicating instrument,
Stylus type instruments gnerally consist of the
ct wee
following units: ©.
Sts i Skid or shoe,
i, Finely pointed stylus or probe.
‘wtece ii, An amplifying device for magnifying the stylus
Fig.7.3 ‘movement and indicator.
iv, Recording device to produce a trace and
¥, Means for analysing the trace
Skid or shoe is drawa slowly over the surface either by hand or by: ‘motor drive. It follows.
the general contours of the surface and provides a datum for measurments, The stylus moves
over the surface with the skid. It moves vertically up and down due to surface roughness and
records the micro-geometricel form of the surface, The stylus movements are magnified by
anamplifying device and recorded to produce a trace. The trace is then analysed by some
automatic device ineorported in the instrument.
Disadvantages :
i Theinstruments are bulky and complex.
li, They aré relatively fragile,
iil, Intial cost is high.
iv, Measurement are limited to a section of surface.%. Need skilled operators for measurements,
vi, Distance between stylus and skid and the shape of the skid introducés errors in
measurement for wavy surfaces.
Inspite of all the above disadvantages, the main advantage of such instruments is that the
electrical signal available can be processed to obtain any desired roughness parameter or can
be recorded for display or subsequent analysis, Therefore the stylus type instruments are
widely ysed for surface texture measurements, .
Q.5. Explain the following terms used in surface finish measurement; Roughness,
Waviness, Effective profile, Lay, Sampling tength, Mean line and centre line of
profile. i:
Ans: L Roughness : It is also called primary texture It refers to surface irregularities of
small wave length Le. finely spaced irregularities produced due the action of cutting tool,
{igtion, wear or corrosion, toot feed rate or tool chatter. (refer fig. 7.1)
ii,” Waviness : Or secondary text
length of periodic character, i. irregularities of greater spacing which are in the form of
waves, This type of irregularities are caused due to misalignment of centres,vibrations, machine
or work deflections, warping etc. (refer 6.1)
iil, Effective profite : It is rea! contour ofa surface obtained by using instruments.
iv, Lay + Its the direction of predominant surface pattem produced by tool maiks or
scratches. Symbols used to indicate the direction of lay are given below
|| = Lay parallel to [Link] representing sucface to which the symbol is applied
e.g, parallel shaping,[Link].
| _ =" Lay:perpendicualr to the line representing the surface to wich the symbols applied
e.g. side view of shaping. O.D. grinding.
Lay angular in both directions to the Hine representing the surface to which symbol
is applied e.g. transversed end mill, end wheel grinding.
Multidirectinal lay e.g. lepping,superfinishing,
Lay approximately circular relative to the centre of the surface to which the symbol
is applied e.g. facing on lathe.
R = Lay approximately radial relative to the centre of the surface to which the symbol
is applied,e.g. grinding on a turntable, indexed on end mil,
SSS es og
° Fig.7.4 .
¥. Sampling length : It is the length of profile necessary for the evatuation of the
itcegularities to be taken into account, It is measured in a direction parallel to the general
direction of the profile,
x
oz
$FEE AE
283
2hSur feasorments
vi. Mean Line of Profile ; Itis the line dividing the effective profile such that within the
sampling length the sum of the squares of vertical ordinates(y1-y2...) between the effective
profile points and the mean line is minimum.
“ [Link] Line of Profile ? It is the line
dividing the effective profile such that the areas
‘embraced by the profile above and below the
line are equal, For repeatitive wave form
(profile) the centre line and meaa line are
equivalent, Though true repetitive profile is
Fig. 7.5 impossilbe in any manufacturing protess, mean
fine and centre line are astumbed to equivalent for practical purposes.
Q.6. What do you mean by Ra and Re vatues ?
Ans : Ra value : Roughness average (Ra) is the arithmetical mean deviation of the surface
profile from the mean line. It is defined as the
arithmetic average of the vertical ordinates (y,, Yq»
Yq-s:) from the mean regard less of the arithmetic
TO6rats
L
é 7 .
‘Where n= number of divisions in sample length L:
isten point height of irregularities and is defiried as the average difference
between the five highest peaks and five lowest valleys on the surface profile within the -
sampling length from aline parallel to the mean line and not crossing the profile, Mathematically,
where R,,R, ...: Ryare five highest peaks and R,, R, .... Ryg are five lowest valleys.
.Q.7. State how surface finish is designated on drawings ?
‘Ans : The surface roughness is represented as shown in fig. 7.8(2)
‘The following inforinstion is furnished with the symbol.
i. Surface roughness value i.e. Ra value in mm,
i, Machining allowance inmm, —*Shopes
Fig. 7.8
{ii Sampling length or instrument cut-offlength in mm.
iv, Method of machining such as milled, ground, lapped, shapped eic.
¥._ Direction offay in the symbol form as =, 1 ,X,M,C,R.
e.g. a milled surface having Ra value 6,3 m, with cut-off length 2.5mm and direction of
lay parallel will be répresented as shown in fig. 7.8 (b)
‘The surface roughness on drawing is represented by the symbols given below.
» Symbol Ra value in pm.
v 8 10.25 ,
vv “ V6t0s
vvv 0.025 to 1.6
vvVyv <0.025 i
Q.8. State and explain the methods of mesuring primary texture (roughness) of a
surface.
‘Ans : In practice, three methods of measuring primary texture(roughness) of surface are
used, .
“A, Ten point height method ; (refer fig.7.7)
In this method, the average difference between the five highest peaks sind five lowest
valleys of surface texture. within the sampting length, measured from a line parallel to the
‘mean line and not crossing the profile is used to denote the amount of surface roughness.
Mathematically,
Rz=ten point height of irregularities,
1
Rew FREER TR ERD - Ret RtRERS Ryo)
‘This method is relatively simple method of analysis and measures the total depth of surface
irregularities within the sarapling lengtls: But it does not give sufficient information about the
surface ano account is taken of frequency of the irregualrities and the profile shape. It is
used when itis desired to contro! the cost of finishing for checking the rough machining.
2, RMS. Value : (refer fig.7.9) .
Inthis method roughness is measured as the average deviation from the nominal surface.
Root mean square value measured is based on the least squares.
HEE IE Rae EE RE.RMS value is defined as the square root of the arithmetic
mean of values of the sqaures of ordinates of the surface
measured from a mean line. Its obtained by setting many
equidistant ordinates on the mean ling (y,,¥,,¥,+....) and
then taking the root of the mean of the squared ordinates.
Letus assume that the sample length “L? is divided
into “n’ equal parts and y 7» ¥, are the heights of the
Fig.7.9
ordinates erected a those points Then
RMS average = [Yi Yi #95 * wn,
a
3. CLA value : fn this method also, the surface roughness is measured as the average
deviation from the nominal surface,
“Centre Line Average or Arithmetic Average (AA)
is defined as the average values of the ordinates from
the mean line, regerdtess of the arithmetic signs of
the ordinates.
WBA + ne
CLA Value or AA Value = >
Serving tngh 44) A +A +A, +.
: . 2
Fig.7.10 . asA
COLA value measure is preferred to RMS vahie measure because ité value canbe easily
determined by measuring thé areas with planimeter or graph or can be readily determined in.
electrical instruments by integrating the movement of the stylus displaying the result on an.
average meter. “
Q.9. What is meant by RMS vatue and CLA value ?
Ans : Refer Q 8
Q.10, State the methods of measuring surface finish, Show by proper symbols and
values the different surface finish,
: The following two methods are used for measuring the surface finish of surfaces,
1, Inspection by comparison methods : In these methods, the surface texture is
assessed by observation of the surfaces. These are the methods of qualitative analysis of
surface texture, The texture of the surface to be tested is compared with that of a specimen
‘of known roughness value and finished by similar machining process. Though these methods
are rapid, the results are riot reliable because they can be misleading if comparison is not
made with the surfaces produced by similar techniques. The various methods available for
comparison are: .
AnsMetrology & Quality Control
‘Visual inspection, ii, Scratch inspection,
‘Touch inspection, : iv. Microscopic inspection,
\,, Surface photographs, vi. Micro-interferometer,
vii, Wallace surface Dynamometer and vii Reflected light intensity.
2, Direct instrument measurements : These are the methods of quantitative analysis.
“These methods enable to determine the numerical value of surface finish of any surface-by
using instruments of stylus probe type operating on electrical principles.e.g. profitometer,
‘Tomtison surface meter, etc.
For symbols and values of surface finish refer Q.7
Q.11. Fallowings are the Ra values for jobs. Mention the method of manufacturing -
with 3, 6, 4, 1,6 and 0.08 microns, °
Ans : Ra value in microns . Mathod of manufacturing.
3 Broaching or resiming.
64 Shaping, Drilling
16 Milling, grinding
0.008 lapping, superfinisheing.
Q.12 In the measurement of surface roughness, heights of successive 10. peaks and
troughs were measured from.2 datum and were 33, 25, 30, 19, 22, 27,29, and
20 microns. If these measurements were obtained on 10 mm length, determine
CLA and RMS values of surfaces roughness ?
‘Ans ; CLA value of Ra value or AA value =.
Yet Ve FY, # aes
a
33 +25 +30 + 19 + 22 +18 + 32 +27 +29 +20
10 :
= 25.5 microns,
RMS Values
. fowiynt.
o
: _ BEDS SI +19 Fae FE FIP FOP Fe FO
10
= 26.03 microns
Q.13 Describe the comparison methods used for measuring the surface finish,
[Link] inspection by comparison methods, the surface texture is assessed by observation of
the surface, These are methods of qualitative analysis of the surface texture. The texture ofSurface Finish Measurments Bea
the surface to be tested is compared with that of a specimen of known roughness value and
finished by similar machining processes, Though these methods are rapid, the results are not
reliable because they can be misleading if comparison isnot made with the surface produced
by similar techniques, The various methods available for comparision are :
1. Visual Inspection :
2. Touch Inspection _
3. Scratch Inspection
4-Microscopic Inspection
5, Surface Photographs
[Link]-Interferometer
7. Wallace Surface Dynamometer
8, Reflected Light Intensity
‘Touch Inspection : This method can simply assess which sutface is more rough, it cannot,
ive the degree of surface roughness. Secondly, the minute flaws can't be detected. In this
method, the finger tip is moved along the surface at a speed of about 25 mm per second and *
the irregularities as small as 0.0125 mm can be detected. In modified method atennis ball is
rubbed over the surface and surface toughness is judged thereby.
‘Viswal Inspection :Tn thi method the surface i inspected by naked eye. This method is
atways likely to be misleading particularly when surfaces with high degrees of finish are
inspected . It is therefore limited to rougher surfaces,
Scratch Inspection : In this method a softer material like lead, babbit or plastic is rubbed
over the surface to be inspected. The impression of the scratches on the surface produced is
then visualised, :
Microscopic Inspection : This is probably the best method for examining thé surface
texture by comparison. But since, only a'small surface can be inspected at a time several
readings are required to get an average value. In this method, » master finished surface is
placed under the thicroscope and compared with the surface under inspection. Alternatively,
A stidight edge is placed ot the surface to be inspected and a beam of light projected at about
{60%to the work. Thus the shadow is cast into the surfce, the seratches are magnified and the
surface and the surface irregularities can be studied,
Surface Photographs :Jn this method magnified photographs of the surface are taken
with different types of illumination to reveal the irregularities.
Tethe vertical illumination is used then defects like irregularities and sératches appear as
dark spots and flat portion of the surface appears as bright area. In case of oblique illumination,
reverse is the case. Photographs with different illumination are compared and the result is
enseeadeee Meirology & Quality Control
Micro Interferemeter : In this method, an optical flat is placed on the surface to be
inspected and illuminated by a monochromatic source of light. Interference bands are studied
through a microscope. The scratches in the surface appear as interference lines extending
from the dark bands into the bright bands. The depth of the defect is measured in terms of the
fraction of the interference bands,
‘Wallace Surface Dynamemeter t Itis a sort of friction meter. It consists of a pendulum
in which the testing shoes are damped to a bearing surface and a predetermined spring pressure
can be applied. The-pendulum is lifted to its initial starting position and allowed to swing over
the surface to be tested. Ifthe surfsce is smooth, then there will be less friction and pendulum
swings for @ longer period. Thus, the time of swing is a direct measure of surface texture,
Reflected Light Intensity : In this method a beam of light of known quantity is projected
upon the surface. This light is reflected in several directions as beans of lesser intensity and
‘the change in light intensity in different directions is measured by a photocell, The measured
intensity changes are already calibrated by means of reading taken from surface of known
roughness by some other suitable method,
Surface Roughness Comparison Specimen ; The roughness comparison specimens
are either flat or segmented cylindrical pieces having known roughness value. They ere used
for quantitative assessment of surface roughness of a finished product by comparison, These
specimens are made up of hard, wear resistant materials such as stec! having hardness of
about 400 HB, nickel alloy ar metaltised plastics. They are rigidly supported on a base to
prevent warping or distortion during use.
“The assessmemt of surface roughness Of finished product is done by comparison with the
specimen of known roughness value and finished by machining process similar to that of the
product under test. The comparison may be made by visual inspection or touch inspection,
In visual inspection, the product and the specimen are seen simultaneously and the roughness
of the product is compared with that of the specimen by naked eye. In touch inspection, the
feel of the surface is experienced by moving finger naily lightly across the lay of the roughness
of the product to be tested and afterwards moving across the surface of the specimen of
known roughness value: Then the two feels are compared to assess the surface roughness of
the product. .
“These specimens have also proved to be very good devices for training the [Link]
judge the R, value by feel and appearance of the surface. It should be noted that the surface
‘being compared should be clean and dry. However, the results obtained by comparison vary
from person to person, Errors may also be caused due (o difference in the material, shape,
method of machining, method of finish, etc. ofthe product and the specimen,Q.14 The surface finish on the milled surface is not to exceed S mm Ra with a cut-off
Tength 2 mm, machining atlowance 0.5 mm and direction of lay parallel. How will you
represent it on a drawing ?
Ans. Milled
Fig, 7.11
Q.15, Deseribe any one method of checking the surface finish of a mechined surface.
Ans : There are two methods used for measuring surface finish of machined surfaces, viz,
‘tomparison methods and direct instrument measurements, Comparative methods are used for
qualitative analysis of surface texture while instruments are used for quantitive analysis ic. 10
determine numerical value of the surface Sinish, Nearly all the instruments used are stylus
probe type of instruments, operating on electrical principles. The output signal is amplified and
then used to operate a recording or indicating instrument, One of the direct measuring
instruments is explained below. .
Itis an indicating and recording instrument useid to
measure roughness in microns. The principle of the
instrument is similar to gramophone pick up. The
instrument consists of two principle units; a tracer and
asin [Y weet
fet
! an amplifier. Taceris a finely pointed stylus Itis mounted
th in the pick up unit which consists ofan induction coil
sone [ located in the field of a permanent magnet, When the
| tracor is moved across the surface to be tested, itis
in displaced vertically up and down due to the surface
ANN irregularities. This causes the induction coil to move in
Pallet the field ofthe permanent magnet and induces & voltage.
Fig.7.12- Profilometer The induced voltage is amplified and recorded.
This instrument is best suited for meas
1g Surface finish of deep bores.
Q.16 Deseribe the construction and working of the Taylor-Hobson-Talysurf.
Ans, The Taylor-Hobson-Talysurf : Taylor-Hobson Talysurf is a stylus and skid type of
instrument working on earrier modulating principle, Its response is more rapid and accurate
as comperéd to Temlinson Surface Meter. The measuring head of this instrument consists of
a sharply pointed diamond stylus of about 0.002 mm tip radius and skid or shoe which is
drawn across the surface by means of motorised driving unit.Ea Metrology & Quality Control
In this insirument the stylus is made to trace the profile of the surface irregularities, and
the ostillatory movement of the stylus is converted into changes in electric current by the
arrangement as shown in Fig. 7,13, The arm carrying the stylus forms an armature which.
pivots about the centre piece of E-shaped stamping. On two legs of (outer pole pieces) the E-
shaped stamping there are coils carrying an a:¢. current. These tivo coils with other two
resistances form an oscillator. As the armature is pivoted about the central leg, any movement
of the stylus causes the ‘air gap to vary and thus the amplitude of the original a.c, current
flowing in the coils is modulated, The output of the bridge thus consists of modulation onlyas
shown in Fig, 7.13. This is further demodulated so that the current now is directly proportional
to the vertical displacement of the stylus only, 4
4
[PSSST stoped ‘
Te
Te
4
. . . if
| [coset |B _ :
Carin “cue Sate
Fig, 7.13 Taylor-Hobson-Talysurf
‘The demodulated output is caused to operate a pen recorder to produce a permanent record
and the meter to give anumerical assessment directly.‘Machine Too! Testing Techniques Beary
8
Chapter...
MACHINE TOOL
TESTING TECHNIQUES
Q.1. What is straightness? Explian briefly how the stringhtness is measured.
Ans + Itismot easy to define what is meant by straightness. In metrology a line is said to be
straight over a given length if its deviations w.r-. the ideal reference line are within specified
tolerence limits or ifthe variations of the distances ofits points fromtwo planes perpendicular
to each other and parallel o the general direction of the line remain within specified tolerence
limits.
‘The most convenient method of testing straightness of a surface of any length to ahigh
degree of accuracy is by using spirit level or auto-colimator.
:
‘Spi et
Sia be
tied
Feet
wo ‘Sorc tote
. Fig.8.1 * estes
A straight line is drawn on the surface whose straightness is to be checked. A sensitive
spirit level, fitted with two feet at a convenient distance apart is moved along this line in steps
‘equal to the pitch distance between the contre lines of the feet, For each position, the reading
ig noted. Variations in the bubble position represent angular variations in the surface and
hese are converted into differences in eight of the feet above or below the starting point.
If auto-colimator is used, then a block fitted with feet at convenient distance apart and
carrying a plane reflector is moved along the surface in steps equal to the pitch of the feet,
Angular variations are measured with auto-colimator.
Spirit level can be used to check only horizontal surfaces, but anto-collimator may be used
ona surface in any plane.aaa Metrology & Quality Control
Q.2. State the various methods used to test straightness of a surface and explain
briefly any one of them.
The following methods are used to measure the straightness of a surface.
Using straight edges i Spirit level method.
Auto-colimator method Liquid gauge method.
Beam comparator method.
Straight edge method : This is simplest method of testing straightness of w surface. A
straight edge of known accuracy is applied to the surface to be tested and degree of contact:
is determined by marking, feelers or light gap. The more accurate method of measuring
straightness by a-straight edge is wedge method,
A straight edge is supported at the points for minimum deflection on two unequal piles of
slip gauges so that its at a slight inclination to the surface to be tested. The distance between
the supports is divided into number of equal parts and marked on the straight edge. If both
straight edge and surface are perfectly straight,the gap at each point will vary uniformaly.
Assume that the slip gauges used have values 10mm and
vag aft 10. 1mm as shown in the Fig.8.2 Let the distance between
- the slip values be divided into § number of equal parts, The
gap at each point will, therefore, vary by 0.02 mm (0.1/5).
‘Now we can determine the value of pile of slips required for
02 -$% 55 exact contact at each position,e.g. atthe first position itis
” Fig.8.2 10mm; at the second position it will be 10.02mm; atthe third
it witl be 10.04 mm and so on. Insert the slip gauges of appropriate value at each marked
position. If there is no error, the slips will make contact with both the surfaces exactly al the
marked positions. If, however, there are errors in straightness, the slips will not fit exactly at
their marked positions, but will be displaced one way or other along the stright edge by amounts
proportional to the errors,
This is very sensitive method of measurement and can be made as sensitive as desired by.
choosing asmall wedge angle and large number of measuring positions, Care must be taken.
to see that he slips do not wring 10 the surface, otherwise the whole sensitivity will be lost.
Q.3. Describe briefly Beam comparator method of testing straightness.
Ans * This method uses an instrument of Beam type designed by Rochdale Technical College
and manufactured by the sigma Insturment Company, Ltd., under the name “Rochdale Flamess,
bd gee Tester””, Beam comparator was originally designed for
bem ‘esting the flatness of surface tables, but can also be used
Sor testing the straightness of surfaces.
‘The instrument consists of a light, rigid beam on the
underside of which are fitted two bell-ended feet;one at
the centre and other near one end. At the other end of
Fig.8.3 the beam,a dial gauge is fitted. The axis cf the dial guageMachine Tool Testing Techniques ize
plunger is vertical and in line with the two fixed feet; The instrument is plaged on the surface
to be tested on the two {eet and moved along the surface in steps equal to the pitch of the
feet, At each position the reading ofthe dial gauge is taken, The readings give the heights at
different positions, above or betow the line through the two points on which the fixed feet rest.
This instrument can be used to check the straightness of long surfaces in any ps
Q.4, Explain how the flatness of a surface cam be tested,
Ans : Flatness testing is nothing but extension of straightness testing. A sufface can be
considered to be formed by infinitely large number of lines. The surface will be truly flat only
if all the lines are straight and they lie in the same plane. Therefore, to test the flatness of 2
surface itis essential to measure the straightness of some of the number of lines forming it.
‘The deviation of a large surface such as surface table or
‘machine table from the true plane can be determined by the use
ofspiritlevel, auto-colimator or Beam comparator. The principle
of the method is same for all the instruments,
First number of lines parallel to the sides of the surface to be
tested are drawn on the stirface, at distances equal to the pitch
distance of the base of the instrument used. The straightness of
all these lines is determined by moving the instrument along the’
"S777? ines and then those lines are related with each other in [Link]
Fig.8.4 33 ‘verify whether they lie in the same plane or not! Thus the whole -
surface is surveyed along 2 number of lines and the variation in heights of the points of
instersection of the lines is detemised w.r.t.a datum plane, This datum plane is then adjusted
to become the mean trué plane for the surface,
Q:5 Describe the methods of checking :
i, Parallelism of two axes, é
fi, Parallelism of an axis to a plane.
Ans : Parallelism of twe axes :
a
©
Assume that the parallelism of axes of two cylinders
is to be tested. The instrument used for the testis dial
indicator. It is supported on a base of such shape that the
base slides along one of the cylinders. The dial indicator
is so adjusted that its feeler (plunger) slides along the
another cylinder. The maximum deviation between the.
‘axes of the cylinders at any point may be determined by
gently rocking the dial indicator in direction perpendicular
Fig8.5 to the axes. .
Parallelism of an axis to a plane :In this test, a dial indicator is held on a support with a flat.
erro)Ea Bato & Quality Contra ]
axis to touch the surface of the cylinder representing the
axis, The insturment is moved along the plane fora
distance over which parallelism testis to be performed.
At cach point of measurement, readings of the
instrument are noted, If the maximum difference
r between thé several readings taken at number of
Plane points does not exceed a predetermined value, the
Fig.8.6 axis can be said to be parallel to the plane.
Q.6. Explain how the squareness of an axis of rotation with a given plane can be
tested?
Ans : Assume that squareness of axis of rotation of a spindle with a plane is to be tested. A.
1. dial indicator is mounted on the arm attached to the spindle. The
iso feeter (plunger) of the dial indicator is adjusted parallel to the
Sten axis of rotation of the spindle, so that as the spindle revolves, the
plane of rotation of free end of the plunger is perpendicular to
the axis of rotation, Now the plunger of the dial indicator is made
to touch the plane under test. The spindle'is slowly revolved and
readings are noted at various positions. The variations in the~
readings of the instrument represent the deviation of paralfetitt
Fig 8.7 between the plane of free end of the plunger and the plane under
testor deviation in the squarencess of the axis of rotation of the spindle with the plane iinder tt,
Q.7. Axis of rotation of live centre of lathe machine is required to be checked for
parallelism with respect to Inthe bed surface. State the instruments required,
and describe method with. sketch ?
Diol indicator
~Alest mondrel Carriage
Fig. 8.8
The instruments required for the test are a test mandrel and a dial indicator.
‘The test mandrel is held between the centre on the lathe machine, Dial indicator is held in
the compound rest and adjusted so that its feeler (plunger) touches the mandrel surface, first
above the bar and then on the side of it, The mandrel is kept stationary and dial gauge is,
moved along by traversing the carriage. Any inaccuracy either in the vertical or horizontal
plane is indicated on the dial gauge.
fMachine Tool Testing Techniques
Q.12. What is optical flat? Explain how interferecne fringes are formed when optical
fat is placed ona surface to be tested ?
‘Ans : Optical latis a cylindrical piece of a transparent material usually glass or quartz, with
one or two highty polished working surfaces. It is used to check the flatness of pieces, gauge
blocks, micrometer anvils, erc.
‘When an optical flatis placed on work piece surface it
will not form an intimate contact, but will be et slight
inclination to the surface, forming én air wedge between
cir wedye the surfaces. If optical flat is now illuminated bys
monochromatic (single wave length) squrce of light,
interference fringes will be observed, These are produced
or
Surtct Yee
Teste! “by the interference of light rays reflected from the bottom
Fig. 8.13 face of the optical lat and top face of the work piece being
tested through the layer of air, .
Consider a ray of light incident at A on’an optical flat placed over a work piec. to be
tested. It passes through the optical flat and atits bottm facezitis divided into two components,
‘One comonent of the incident rays gets reflected from the bottom of the optica Hla at Bin the
direction BC and the other portion, transimtted through the layer of the entrapped air will te
reflected by the top face of the work piece at D in the direction DEF. The paths travelled by
both the reflected rays differ by an amount BDE i. the second component of the ray Ing
behind the first by an amount equal to twice the air gap, Though Both the components have the
same wave length and start in phase, the difference in their paths causes them to be either in
phase or out of phase at C and F. If the path difference between the reflected rays is even
multiple of half wave length, the extra distance the ray reflected from the work piece surface
has to travel will cause it to be 180° out of phase with the ray reflected from the lower face of
the dptical lat and the reflected rays will cancel ench other and darkness will be observed, If
the path diference is an odd multiple of half wave length they will be in phase with each other
and will reinforce each other. So brightness will be observed. Depending upon the air gap
“between surfaces, we will get altemate dark and bright bands due the interference of light.
Q.13. With what instrument and how you will take finish maesurement of micrometer
anvil surfaces ?
‘Ans : Deviations of flatness of the micrometer anivl surfaces are tested with an optical flat.
Optical flat is brought into contact with each of the two anvil surfaces in tum and moved tll
minimum number of interference fringes are observed, i.e, closed curves are observed. The
number of interference fringes observed on cach of the 1wo anvil surfaces should not be mioie
than 2 for all ranges of Grade - I micrometers. :
‘The parallelism of the anivl surfces is also tested with optical flat (of type B), Optical fat
is placed in contact with the fixed navil and moving anvil is brought in contact with the opposité“Metrology & Quality Control
face of the optical flat. Interference fringes produced are observed. The sum of the interference
fringes observed on the twvo surfates should not exceed 6,8 and 10 for ranges 0-25,25-75 and
75-100 mm micrometers.
Q.14. By using optical flat and monochromatic light state how you will determine
whether the given flat or curved sufaces are concave or convex
‘Ans : When an optical flat is placed on a surface to [Link] and illuminated bya
monochromatic light interference fringes i.e. alternate dark and bright bands are observed
The fringe pattern represents the contour map of the surface under test, Each band indicates
‘a path of constant seperation between the optical flat and the surface under test.
Une of
ce
Concave
surface surface
Teihe surface to be tested is perfectly fat the fringes or bands produced will be straight
and even after applying fight pressure at any edge there will not be chatige in the fringe
pattem. But ifthe surface is not flat, the bands obtained will be curved, (refer fig 6.) Ifthe
band curve around the point or line of contact, the surface is conve and if the bands curve in
the opposite direction. The surface is concave, Ifthe curvature of bands is more, it indicates
more convexity and vice-versa,
Convee Corus
surlece su
8.15
‘When the surface under testis curved, circular bands with a central bright spot atthe point
of contact are observed, To determine whether the surface is concave or convex, itis préssed
lightly with finger tip at one edge. Ir the centre of the bands is displaced and the fringes come
closer, the surface under test is convex; If application of light presure at edge makes no
change, then light pressure is applied at the centre. Ifthe bands move apart and number of
bands is reduced the surface to be tested is concave,Machine Tool Testing Techni :
Qs.
Ans
List the various geometrical checks made on machine tools ?
‘The various geometrical/alignment checks generally carried out on machine tools-are:
1. Straigthness : Straightness of guide ways and slide ways of machine «ls.
2, Flatness : Matness of machine table and slide ways.
3. Parallelism Equidistance and alignment : of slide ways and axes of various moving
parts with reference to somé standard planes.
4, True running and alignment : of shafts and spindle relative to other axes and surfaces.
5. Pitch or Lead error: _ i) of lead screw of gears.
6, Eccentricity, out of roundness, periodical axial slip eamming ete.
7. Dividing error’ : of dividing heads ; indexing heads,
Q.16. Name the equipment required for geometrical tests ?
‘Ans : The measuring equipment used for sligniment tests are:
1. Dial gauge.
Test mandrels.
Straight edges and squares.
Spiritlevel,
Auto collimator,
aya eb
‘Waviness meter etc.
Q.17. Distinguish between alignment test and performance test of a machine tool?
‘Ans : The alignment test is carried out to check the grade of manufacturing accuracy of the
machine tool. Ii consists of checking the relationship between varius machine elements (such
as bed, table, spindle etc,) when the machine too! is idle and unloaded. i
Performance test consists of chekcing the acctiracy of the finished components and is i
known as practical test. The performance tes therfore, consists of preparing the actual test
jobs on the machine and checking the accuracy of the jobs produced. Itis earried out to know
whether the machine tool is capable of producing the parts within the specified limits or not.
Q.18, Describe how you would perform the following alignment tests.
Straightness of saddle level in horizontal plane.
i. Alignment of both centres in vertical plane.Parallelism of main spindle to saddle movement.
iv, True running of head stock centre,
¥. Parallelism of tail stock slecve with saddle movement / machine bed guides.
Ans : i. Straightness of saddle level in horizontal Plane.
Measuring Instruemnts : Cylindrical test mandrel. (600mm
Tong), dial indicator.
Procedure? The mandrél is held between centres. The dial
indicator is mounted on the saddle, The spindle of the dial indicator
is allowed-to touch the mandrel, The saddle is then moved
Tongitudinally along the length of the mandrel. Readings are taken
at different places,
Permissible error : 0,02 mm over length of mandrel,
Alignment of both the centres in the vertical plane :
: Measuring instruments : Cylindrical mandrel 600 mm long, dial
Ag gauge. =
Procedure : The test mandrel is held between centres, on the
saddle in vertical plane as shown in Figure, Then the saddle along
with diel gauge is travelled longinidinally along the bed ways, over
‘the entire length of the mandrel and the readings are taken at
Fig 8.17 different places,
Permissible error : 0.02 mm over 600 mm length mandrel. (TaiJstock centre isto lie higher
only), :
iii, Paralletism of main spindte to saddle movement :
a Invertical plane __b. In horizontal plane, :
‘Measuring Instruemnts : Test mandrel with taper shank and
300 mm long cylindrical measuring part, dial gauge.
Procedure ; The dial gauge is mounted on the saddle, The dial
‘gauge spindle is made to touch the mandrel and the saddle is moved
to and fro. It is checked in vertical as well as in horizontal plane.
Permissible error : a) 0.02/300 mm (Mandrel rising towards
Fig 8.18." ~ free erid only. (b) 0.02/300-mm (Mandrel inclined at {ree end
towards tool pressyife only.
iv, True running of head stock center :
Measuring Instruement : Dial gauge.
Procedure : The live centre is held in the tailstock spindle and it
is rotated. ts trueness is checked by means of dial gauge.
Permissible error 0.01 mm.‘Machine Tool Testing Techniques
¥. Parallelism of tailstock sleeve to saddle movement :
‘Measuring Instruments + Dial indicator,
Procedure : Tailstock sleeve is fed outwords, The dial gauge is
* mounted on the saddle. Its spindle is touched to the sleeve at one
en and then saddte is moved 10 and fro, itis checked in HLP: and
VR. also,
Permissible error :2)0,01/100 mm, (Tailstock sleeve inclined
Fig. 8.20 towards toot pressure only, (b)0.01/100 mim (Tailstock sleeve vsing
towards free end only.)
Q.19. Describe how you would perform the following alignment tests,
i. Movement of upper slide paratlet with main spindle in vertical plane.
ii, Parallelism of tailstock sleeve taper socket to saddle movement,
Levelling of tathe,
iv. True running of locating cylinder of main spindle.
¥. True running of taper socket in main spindle.
‘Ans: i, Movement of upper slide parallel with main spindle in vertical plane :
Measuring Instruments :
“Test mandrel with taper shaiik and 300 mim long cylindrical
measuring part, dial gauge,
+ Permissible error : 0.037100 mm
ii. Paralletism of tailstock sleeve taper socket to saddle
== movement : 2) V2. b) in ILP.
Measuring Instruments : the mandrel with tiper shank and a
Fig, $21 cylindrical measuring par of 300 mm length, dal indicator.
Procedure : Test mandrel is held with its taper shai in a tail
ell % stock sleeve taper socket. The dial gauge is mounted on the saddle
‘The dial gauge spindle is made to touch with the mandrel. The
saddle is then travelled longitudinally along the bed way and
i readings are taken, .
Fig, 8.22
fii, Levelling of Lathe: a. in longitudianl direction,
2 _ bu intransyerse direction,
Measuring Instruement : Spirit level, gauge block to suit the
guide ways of the lathe bed.
* Procedure ; The gauge block with the spirit level is placed on
Fig. 8.23 the bed ways on the front position, back position and in eros,
wise direction. The position of the bubbie in the spirit level is checked and the readings are
taken,‘Machine Tool Testing Techniques
v. Parallelism of tailstock sleeve to saddle movement :
Measuring Instruments:: Dial indicator.
Procedure : Tailstock sleeve is fed outwords, The dial gauge is
mounted on the saddle. Its spindle is touched to the sleeve at one
end and then saddle is moyed to and fro, itis checked in H.P: and
'V.P. also.
Permissible error : a) 0.01/100 mm, (Tailstock sleeve inclined
Fig. 8.20 towards tool pressure only. (b) 0.01/10 mm (Tailstock sleeve rising
towards free end only.)
Q.19. Describe how you. woutd perform the following alignment tests.
‘Movement of upper slide paratlel with main spindle in vertical plane.
ii. Parallelism of tailstock sleeve taper socket to saddle movement.
iii. Levelling of Jathe.
iv, True running of locating cylinder of main spindle.
¥. True running of taper socket in main spindle.
Ans : i. Movement of upper siide paralfe! with main spindle in vertical plane +
Measuring Instruments :
F. Test mandrel with taper shank and 300 mm long cylindrical
measuring part, dial gauge.
- Permissible error : 0.03/100 mm.
ii. Parallelism of tailstock sleeve taper socket to saddle
movement : a) V.P, b) in HP.
Measuring Instruments : the mandrel with taper shenls end a
cylindrical measuring part of 300 mm length, dial indicator.
Procedure : Test mandrel is held with its taper shank in a tail
stock sleeve taper socket: The dial gauge is mounted on the saddle.
The diel gauge spindle is made to touch with the mandrel. The
saddle is then travelled longitudinally along the bed way and
readings are taken,
Fig, 8.22
iti, Levelling of Lathe: a. inlongitudianl direction
b. in transverse direction.
Measuring Instruement : Spirit level, gauge block to suit the
guide ways of the lathe bed.
Procedure : The gauge block with the spirit fevel is placed on
Fig.8.23 the bed ways on the front position, back position and in cross
~ wise direction. The position of the bubble in the spirit level is checked and the readings are
taken, .Metrology & Quality Control
Permissible error: Front guide ways: 0.02 mm/m convex only. Rear guide ways, 0.01 mm
‘m convex only to 02: mm/m convex only cross wise direction : 0.02 mm/m. No twist permitted,
iv, True running of locating cylinder of main spindl
. Measuring Instrument : Dial gauge.
Procedure : The dial gauge is mounted on the bed, touching at a
point on main spindle, The main spindle is rotated by hand aiid
ii, Parallelism of the work table surface of the main
spindle.
ili, Parallelism of the clamping surface of the work table in its longitudinal motion.
iv, Paraltelism of the cross (transverse)
Ans +, Flatness of work Table :
= = & In longitudinal directions.
afew pe b. In transverse direction. °
© Mexsuring Instruements : Spirit level.
Procedure : A spirit level is placed directly on the table at points
about 25 t030-cm apart, at A,B,C for longitudinal test, and at D,B
_ and F for the transverse test. The readings are noted.
o o ° Permissible error : Direction A-B-C + 0.04/mm Direction
Fig. 8.31 D-E-F+0.04/mm.
ii. Parallelism of the work table surface to the main spindle :
Measuring Instruments : Dial indicator, test mandrel 300 mm long spirit level.Fig. 8.32
Fig. 8.33
spindle:
Fig. 8.34
ann,
ine Tool Testing Techniques
Procedure : The table is adjusted in the horizontal plane by a
spirit level and is then setin its mean position longitudinally, The
mandrel is fixed inthe spindle taper, A dial gauge is set on the
machine table, and the feeler adjusted to touch the lower surface
of the mandrel, The dial gauge seadings at (A) and (B).are
observed, the stand of the dial gauge being moved while the
machine tablé remains stationery.
Permissible error : 0.02/300 mm.
iH, Parallelism of the clamiping surface of the work table in its longitudinal motion :
_ Instruments Dial gauge, straight edge.
Procedure : A dial gauge is fixed to the spindle. The dial gauge
spindle is adjusted to touch the table surface, The table is then
‘moved in longitudinal direction and readings arenoted. Ifthe table
surface is uneyen it is necessary to palce a straight edge on its
surface and the dial gauge feeler is made to rest on the top surface
of the straigtit edge.
Permissible error : 0.02 upto 500 mm length of traverse, 0.03
up to 1000 mm and 0.04 above 1000 mm length of traverse,
iv. Parallelism of the cross (transverse) movement of the work table to the main
in vertical plane
b. in horizontal plane.
Instruments : Dial gauge, test mandrel with taper shank,
~ Procedure : Work tables set in its mean position. The mandrel
isheld in the spindle. A dial gauge fixed to the table is adjusted
50 that its spindle touches the surface of the mandrel. The table
is moved crosswise and the error is measured in the vertical
plane and also in the horizontal plang,
2 Permissible error : 0.02 for the overall transverse movement
of work table.
Q.22. Describe the following alignment tests on-knee type horizontal milling machine ?
i, True running of the internal taper of the main spindle.
Squareness of the centre T slots of work table with main spindle.
iii, Parallelism of the T-slots with the longitudinal movement of the table,
iv. Paralletism between the main spindle and the guiding surface of the overhanging
Ans : i, True running of the internal taper of the main spindle :
Instruments : 300 mm long test mandrel, dial gauge. The test mandrel with its taper
shank is held in the main spindte. Dial gauge is kept scanning the periphery of mandrel, spindle~Metrology & Quality Cor
is rotated and dial gauge readings are noted at different points say A &
Bas shown.
Permissible error : Position A ; 0.01, Position B : 0.02
Hi, Squareness of the centre T-stots of worktable with main spindle :
Instruments : Dial, gauge, special bracket.
Procedure : To check the perpendicularity of the locating slot and the
axis ofthe main spindle, the table should be arranged in the middle position
of ts longitudinal movement, and’a bracket with a tenon atleast 150 mm
Jong inserted in the locating slot, as shown in Fig. 10.18
‘A dial gauge should be fixed in the spindle taper, the feeler being
adjusted to touch the vertical face of the bracket, Observe the reding on
the dial gauge when the bracket is near one end of the table, then
swving over the dial gauge and rove the bracket so thatthe corresponding
readings can be taken near the other end of the table,
Peimissible error : 0.025 mm in 300 mm,
iii, Parallelism of the ‘-slots with the longitudinal movement of the table :
Instruments : Dial gauge special bracket.
Procedure : The general parallelism of the T-slots with the longitudinal
‘movement of the table is checked by using a 150'mm long bracket having
atenon which eniers the slot. The dial gauge is fixed to the spindle taper
and adjusted so that its feeler touches the upper surface of the bracket.
‘Thé tables then moved longitudinally white the bracket is held stationary
by the hand of the operator and dial gauge deviations from parallelism.
isnoted down,
Fig. 837 Permissible error : 0.0125 mm in 300 mm.
iv. Parallelism between the main: spindle and the guiding surface of the overhanging
arm: : 5
Instruments : Dial gauge, mandrel.
Procedure : The overhanging arm is clamped in its
extreme extended position, The dial gauge is fixed to
the arbor support. The fecler of the dial gauge is
adjusted to touch the top ot ride of the test mandrel,
The arbor support can then the moved along the
overhanging arm and the deviations from parallelism
observed on the dial gauge.
Fig. 8.38 Checking the overarm
to the cutter spindle,Gear Measurement = i
Chapter... 9
"GEAR MEASUREMEN
Qu1.. Define an invotute and show how will you check the involute profile of a spur
gear? .
Ais : Invelute is a curve traced by a point on a straight line which rolls around a circle
without slipping or may be defined as the curve traced by a point on a piece of string which is
unwound from a stationary cylinder keeping the string always tight.
The following methods are used to check the involute profile of a spur gear.:
1. Optical projection method :- In this method, the profile of the gear under test is
magnified by optical means and projected on a screen. Itis then compared with master profile.
‘This method is quick and suitable for cheeking the profile of small thin instrument gears.
2, Using involute measuring machine:- The principle of involute measuring machine
isillustrated in Fig.9.t, Ife straight edge is rolled around a base circle without slipping, the.
stylus of the dial gauge attached to the straight edge would traverse a true invotute,
~ In this method, the gear to be tested
isheld on amendrel. A ground circular
Stecight - disc having exactly the same diameter
“edge as the base circle of the gear under test
: is also mounted on the mandrel. The
hash os straightedge ofthe instrument is brought
~ Figg. in contact with the base circle of the
dise, As the gear and disc are rotated, the straight edge moves over the disc without slip. The
stylus of the dial gauge is brought in contact witha tooth pre‘ile. When the gear and disc are
rotated, the stylus moves over the tooth profile and the deviations from the true involute
profile are indicated by the dial gayue.
This method is rapid and accurate upto 0,002mm.
3. Tooth displacement method :- When the involute measuring machines are notavaiable,
the profile of large gear is checked by using a dividing head and a vertical measuring machine
(height gauge). The gear is rotated through small angular increments and the readings of theee Metrology & Quality Control
|
| vertical measuring machine or the height gauge are compared with the theoretically calcutated
! values at about five to ten places along the tooth flank,
Fig. 9.2 Tooth displacement method.
L,-L, = 0089 (8: - 4)
L,-L,= 1,005 (8) > 8)
‘This method is very time consuming but is best suited for cailbrationi of master involute, so
itis used only for very precision components.
Q.2. What are the sources of errors in manufacturing gear ?
Ans : The variation in manufacturing methods and conditions lead to many types of errois
such as error of eccentricity, rum out, pitch error, error in tooth thickness, et
‘The gears are generally manufactured by reproducing method or generating method. In
reproducing method, a formed involute cutter is used to cut gear teeth, The various sources of
errors when gears are made by this method are.:
i Errorsin manufacture of the cutting tool,
ii, Errors in positionting the tool relative to the work and
ii, Errors due to the incorrect indexing of the geat blank.
. In gEnerating method the cutting tool (hob) forms the profile of several tecth simultaneously
during constant relative motion of the too! and blank. The sources of errors in this method are:“Gear Measurement
i Errors in the manufacture of hob,
ii. Error in positioning the tool (hob) relative to the work and
ii, Errors in the relative motion of the tool and blank duting the cutting operation,
Q.3. “Draw aneat sketch of a gear tooth and mention on it two important dimensions.
State the names of the instruments for measuring these dimensions.
Fig.9.3,
errors.
Ans : Spur Gear Measurement : The analytical inspection of the gears consists in determining,
the following teeth elements in which manufacturing errors may be present,
1. Runout, 2. Pitch,
6, Tooth thickness, 7 Concentricity 8 Alignment,
Q.5. Name and descirbe the various methods used to measure the errors in pitch of
the gears.
Ans
by
1) Measuring the distance froma point on the tooth to a point on the next tooth (step by
step method)
bv) Measuring the position of a suitable point on a tooth after the gear has been indexed
through a suitable angle (Direct angular measu-ervent)
‘Tooth to tooth pitch measurement (step by step method) =
fat
Sensit
Foca Screw for
Bp toring eajesiie
‘Aajertase $6"
oF git step
.4 Portabte hand-held base
pitch measuring instrument
SX
Q.4. Namie the various elements of a spur gear which are fo be inspected for po:
«Pitch Measurement : Errors in the tooth spacing or pitch of the gear may be measured
Ans : Tooth thickness : Instruments used
for measuring tooth thickness are gear tooth
vernier caliper, geer tooth micrometer,
addendum comparator, etc,
Pitch : Instruments used for pitch
measurement are gear tooth tangent
micrometer, pitch measuring machines etc.
3. Profile, 4. Lead, 5. Back lash,
9. Composite errors.
‘This method involves the measurement of
variations in pitch between successive teeth ofthe
gears, The differences obtained in this way are
‘elative to the tooth spacing of the arbitarily chosen
datum position,
The portable hand-held instrument which
‘measures the base pitch errors is shown in Fig.9.4
The instrament has three tips. One is fixed
measuring tip. The second is sensitive tip whose
position can be adjusted by a screw and the further‘Metrology & Quality Contral
‘movement of it is transmitted through @ leverage’system to the dial indicator. The third tip is.
adjustable or guide stop. It is meant for the stability of the instrument and its position can also
be adjusted by a screw.
The distance between the fixed and sensitive tip is set to be equivalent to the base pitch of
the gear with the help of slip gauges. This propesty set instrument is applied to the gear so that
all the three tips will contact the tooth profile. The reading on the dial indicator is the error in
the base pitch.
Another method is to use two diat gauges on adjacent teeth with the gear mountéd in
centres. The gear is indexed through successive pitches to give a constant reading on dial A.
‘Any [Link] the reading on dial B indicates that pitches errors are present. The actual error
can be determined by deducting the individual reading on a dial B from the mean of the
readings.”
Direct Angular measurement : The simplest method of determining pitch errots is toset a
aio} guage against a tooth and note the reading, If gear is now indexed through the angular
the reading differes from the originat reading, The difference. between these is the
pitch error. The problem is to index through the exact angular pitch because an
-xing will induce an error in pitch, tis therefore, necessary to use suitable indexing
device to obtain accurate res
Q.6: Describe briefly the methods of checking the following elements of a spur gear.
iRun Out, — ii, Lead.
Ans : i, Run Out: Run out means the eccentricity in the pitch circle. Gears that are eccer
* tend to have periodic variation in sound (vibration) during each revolution. A badly eccentric
tooth may cause an abrupt gear failure. The runout in the gears is measured by means of gear
‘eccentricity testers. The gear is held in the mandrel in the centres, The dial indicator of the
tester possesses special tip depending upon the module of the gear to be checked, The tip is.
inserted in between the tooth spaces. The gear is rotated tooth by tooth. The maximum variation
is noted from the dial indicator reading which gives the runout of the gear. The runout is nvice
the eccentricity,
i, Lead Checking : Lead is the axial advance of a helix for one complete turn as in the
threads of cylindrical worms and teeth ofhelical gears,
Control of lead is necessary to ensure adequate contact across the face with geat and
pinion are properly mounted with axes parallel an¢ in the same plane.
Lead may be checked by lead cheking instruments. The instrument advances a probe
along atooth surface, parallel to the avis while the gear rotates in a specified timed revolution,
‘based on the specified lead.
Q.7, Define back-lash. Describe the method of determining the back lash in gears.
Ans : Back Lash Checking ; Back lash in gears is the play between measuring tooth
surfaces. Back lash is defined as the amount by which tooth space exceeds the thickness of
an engaging tooth, Numerical values of backlash are measured at the lightest point of meshGear Measurement Baas
‘on the pitch circle, in a direction normal to the tooth surface.
However, a tight mesh is objectionable, because of gear sound, increased power losses,
overheating and ruptute of lubricant film, over loaded bearing and premature gear failure.
Hence, some backlash is necessary.
LS. specifies two types of backlash,
1, Circumferential back lash.
2, Normal backlash,
‘The desired amount of back lash is difficult to evaluate, Itis therefore, recommended that
when a designer, user, or purchaser includes a reference to backlash in gearing specification
and drawing, consultation be arranged with the manufacturere.
LS. therefore does not specify (he tolerance etc. Backlash is determined as follows : One
of the two gesrs of the pairs locked, while the others rotated backwards and forward as far
as possible, the maximum displacement recorded by a comparator whose stylus is locked
near the reference cylinder and a tangent 10 this is called the circular backlash,
For spur gars the normal back lashis equal o circular backlash molifiled bythe eosine
of pressure angle.
Q.8 Name the various methods of tooth thickness measurement.
Ans : Tooth Thickness measurement : Since the tooth thickness is defined as the length
‘of an arc, itis not possible to measure it directly. Itis generally measured at pitch circle and
is therefore, the pitch tine thickness of the tooth. In most of the cases, it is sufficient 10
‘measitre the chordial thickness i.e, the chord joining the intersection of the tooth profile with
{he pitch circle.
‘There ere vatious methods of measuring the gear tooth thickness,
i. Chordal thickness method (measurement of tooth thickness by gear tooth vernier
calliper).
ii Constant chord method.
iii, Base tangent method,
iv. Measurment over pins or balls.
Q.9, Deseribe fully the method used to mevsure the chordal thickness of a gear
[Link] the pitch circle,
‘Ans : Chordal Thickness Method : In this metho4, gear tooth vernier calliper is used to
mesure the thickness of gear tooth at the pitch line. The gear tooth verier calliper consists of
two perpendicular vernier arms with vernier scale on each arm. One of the arm is used to
measure the thickness of gear tooth and othes for measuring depth, The calliper is so set that
its slides on the top of tooth of gear under test and the lower ends of the calliperjaws touch
the sides of the tooth at the pitch line, The reading on the horizontal vernier soale gives the.
value of chordal thickness (W) and the reading on the vertical vernier scale gives the value of
chordal addendum (A): These measured values are then compared with the calculated values.
oemMetrology & Quality Control
‘
Ghorda! threkness method
Vernier gear tooth Calltper
Fig: 9.5 Fig.9.6
‘Considering one gear tooth, the theoretical values of w and d can be found out. In fig.9.6, -
wisa chord ADB, but tooth thickness is specified as an arc distance AEB. Also the distance
d adjusted on instruement is slightly greater than the addendum. z wis therefore called chordal
thickness and A is called chordal addendum,
‘Now, from fig.9.6
w= AB = 2AD
Angle AOD = Q = =
Where 'T = Number of teeth
W.= 2AD = 2x AOsin 202
aT
360.
“ie, = W = 2Rsin 2 (R = Pitch Circle Radius )
Pe cp. DLR
[Link] ~ “Tli
‘Gear Measurement I
Also from fig.9.6
@=0C-OD
But OC = OE + addendum = R + m
Q.10. State the limitation of vernier method for measuring the tooth thickness. State
how these can be over come;
Anis : The vernior method described above is not very satisfactory because of the following
reasons. - .
i. ‘The vernieritselfis not reliabte to closer then 0,05 mim or perhaps 0.025 mra with
practice, . bs
ji, ‘The measurements depend on two vernier readings, each of which is 4 function of the
other, .
if, Measurment is made with an edge of the measuirng jaw, notits face, which again does
not lead itself to accurate measurement. ,
‘These problems can be overcome by measuring the span of a convenient number of
tweth with a vernier calliper. : .Metrology & Quality Control
Q.11. Describe the constarit chord method of measuring tooth thickness. What are
its advantages ?
Ans : Constant Chard Method ; In gear tooth calliper method, both the chordal thickness
and chordal addendum are dependent upon the number of teeth, LTence, for measuring a large
number of gears for set, each having different number-of teeth would involve separate
calculations, Thus the procedure becomes abouries and time consuming,
The costant chord method does away with
these difficulties, It enables to employ one setting
for all the gears having the same pitch and
pressure angle irrespective of the number of
teeth,
Constant chord is defined as be chord joining
those points, opposite faces of tooth, which make
contact with the mating teeth when the fine of
the teeth lies on line of the gear centres.
In fig.9.8 AB is known as constant chord. The
value of B and its depth from the tip, where it
‘occurs can be calculated mathematically and then
verified by instruement.
Fig.9.8 ‘The advantage of the constant chord method
is that for all number of teeth (of same module) value of constant chord is same. Secondly, it
readily leads itself to a form of comparator which is more sensitive than the gear tooth vernier.
Q.12, Deseribé the Parkinson's gear testér and state its limitations.
Ans : Pakrinson Gear Tester : Working Principle: A standard gear (master gear) is mounted
ona fixed vertical spindle and the gear to be tested'on another similar spindle mounted ona
sliding carringe. These gears'are maintained in mesh by spring pressure. As the gears are
rotated the movements of the sliding carriage are indicated by a dial indicator, and those
variation are a measure of any irreguleties in the gear under test; alternativley a recorder can
be fitted, in the form of a waxed circular chart and tecords maie of the gear varistion in
accuracy of mesh.” .
Fig.9.9 shows a gear tester for testing spur gears, (Testers are available for bevel, helical
and worm gears also). The gears ‘are mounted on two spindles so, that they are free to rotate
without measurable clearance, The master gear is mounted on a adjustable carriage whose
portion can be adjusted to enable a wide range of gear diameters to be accomodated and it
can be clamped in any desired position. The gear under test is mounted on a floating spring
loaded carriage’ so that the master gear and the gear under test may be meshed together
under controlled spring pressure. The two spindtes can be adjusted so that their axial distance
is equal to the desinged gear centre distance. A scale is attached to one earriage end a vernier
to the other, this enables centre distance to be measured to within 0.025 mm.Gear Measurement Berea
oes rereome neoroes
ELECEAOE RARSEOCER RK
Fig 9.9 Parkinson Geai Tester,
OO Oo
Gear unsatisfactory Gear moderatre Gene fully satisfactory
Fig.9.10 :
“When these gears are in close mesh and rotated any errors in the tooth form,pitch or
concentricity of pited line, will cause a variation in centre distance, Thus, movements of the
carriage, as indicater to the dial gauge shows the errors in the gear under test.
Altemetively a recorder can be fitted as shwori in fig.9.9 in the form of a waved circular or
rectangular chart and records made of the irregulaties in the gear under test fig 9.9, shows a
reproduction of a two typical charts with a reduced'scale and the magnified radial errors,
Gear 1 is an unsatisfactory. Gear 2 is moderate gear and gear 3 is fully satisfactory.
‘Some limitations of Parkinson gear tester are:
1. Generally, 300 mm diameter gear is maximum that can be tested, usually, 150 mm or
smaller diameter fears are also tested.1
‘There's alow friction in the movement ofthe floating carriage and a high sensitivity of
the sensinig unit is important,
The accuracy is of the order of 0.001 mm.
|. Rolling test does not reveal all errors, since the device is sensitive to cumulative position
ertos.
5. Errors are not clearly identified for type profite, pitch, helix and tooth thickness and are.
indistinguishably mixed.
Measurements are directly dependent upon the master gear or reference gear.QUALITY |
_CONTROL |‘Quality Function a
Chapter .
QUALITY FUNCTION
Q.1, Define the term quality.
Ans + Quality is a relative term, it is generally used with reference to the end use of the
product. Quality can be defined as:
Fitness for purpose : The component is said to possess good quality, ifit works well
in the equipment for which itis meant. Quality is thus defined as filmes for purpose,
Hi, Grade : Quality is a distinguishing feature or grado of the product in appearance,
performance, life, reliability, taste, odour, maintainability etc. This is generally called as quality
characteristics.
iit, Degree of perference : Quality is degree to which a specified product is preferred
over competing products of equivalent grade,based on consumer's preference,
iv. Degree of excellence : Quslity is a measure’ of degree of general excellence of the
product,
Q.2: Define the term “Quality controi"and state its objectives.
Ans : The term Quality control can be defined in number of ways:
i. Quality contro! can be defined as an effective system for integrating the quality
development, quality maintenace ard quality improveraent efforts of the various groups
itt at organization, so as to eneble production and services at the most economi-
cal levels,which allow full customers satisfaction.
ii. ean be defined asthe tools devices or skills through which quality activites are
carried out.
Itis the name of the department which devotes itself full time to quality functions,
Objectives of Qiality control :
1, Improved income : To improve company’s income by making the product more
acceptable to the customers.
2. Cost reduction : Fo reduce company’s cost through reduction of losses due to defects.
For example,to achieve lower scrap less rework less sorting, fewer customer retums
etc.3: Interchangeability : To achive interchangesbility of manufacture in targe scale
production.
4, Optimum Quality : To produce optimum quality at minimum price,
5. Customer's satisfaction : To ensure satisfaction of customers with products or
services of high quality level,to build customers good will,reductions of retums and
complaints etc. :
6. Prompt Inspection : To make inspection prompt to ensure quality control.
7. Integration of quality effects : To integrate the quality development, quality”
maintenance end quality improvement efforts of the various groups in the organization,
8. Quality mindness : To create quality mindness in all the persons working in the
organization,
Q.3. Name the various stages (steps) of quality coutral programme in an industry.
‘Ans : The stages in quality control programme are: an
1: Formulation of quality policy.
2. Work out details of product requirement sot the standards (specifications) on the basis
of curstomers preference,cost and pro!
3. Select inspection plan and set up procedure for checking, spocify inspection stages,tools
devices ete,
4, Detect deviations ftom set standards or specifications,
5. Take corrective action through proper authority end make necessary changes to achieve
standards,
6. Decide on salvage method [Link] how the defective parts are disposed off entire
scrap or rework, -
7. Co-ordination of quality problems.
8 Developing quality conseiousness in the organization. .
¢ the importance of quality and quality objectives for nn organisation.
Every manufacturing organisation is concemed with the quality of ts product. While it
is important that quality requirements be satisfied and production schedules met, itis equally
important that the finished product meet established specifications. Because customer’s sat-
isfaction is derived from quality products and services, Stiff competition in thenational and
international level and consumers awareness require production of quality goods and services
for survival and growih of the company. Quality and productivity are more likely to bring
prosperity into the country and improve quality of work life,
However, the management looks to achieve customer satisfaction by ruining its business
at the desired economic level. Both these can be attained by properly intergrating quality
development quality maintenance and quality improvement of the product. The integration of
these three aspects of a product can be achieved through a sound quality control system,
Quality depends mainly on customer's perception. Hence, it is essent
features must be built in the design and maintained in manufacturing which the customer
would like to have and willing to pay forit, Thus the quality objectives of the company are
that all these *concerned with imparting certain abilities in the product to perform satisfactorily in a stated
application at the most economical manner.
These abilities may be categorised in to ten factors as under :
Suitability : For specific application.
Retiability : It should give efficient & consistent performance.
Durability : It should have reasonable life.
Safe and fool proof working,
Affordability = It should be economical
Maintainability : It should be easy to maintain,
Aestheic look : It should look attractive.
Satisfaction to customers : It should satisfy the customers requirements.
Versatility : It should serve number of purposes.
‘A product can be said to posses good quality ifall the above requirements are properly
balanced while designing and manufacturing it,
Q.5.. What is Quality Poticy? Describe the factors to be considered while foamulating
the quality policy of a company,
Ans : Quality Policy : Quality policy refers to the basic principles which are used to guide
the actions of the company, in order to meet the quality objectives. However, economy may
be the additional factor while determining the quality policy, Quite togically, the cost of pro-
duction will increase as the level of accuracy or quality of product is raised. Thus functional
use of the product and cost should be considered simultaneously while formulating the quality
requirements or policy.
The quality policy should always be formulated with reference to its effect on :
1. Manufacturing process.
2, Effect on sales, .
3. Changing nature of customers. ”
4. Inspection costs.
5. Optimum use of resources.
The policy once decided must be laid down in clear cut words framing working
specifications and should be communicated to all concerned from top to bottom.
Applied to quality function some of the basic questions which often require policy
determination are :
1. The standard of outgoing quality : Four competing theories have been’ developed
which may guide the policy for the outgoing level of quality of the product.
& A capability theory : According to this theory the plant should keep the available
machines running through reasonable maintenance and it is the responsibility of the sales
department to sell the product.Rea “Metrology & Quality Control
b. Usage theory : Itis applicable when the liking of the customers differs for the same
design. Some customers may give emphasis on appearance, others on dimensions strength life
[Link],it is necessary to meet the needs of various customers,which may result in several
levels of outgoing quality for the same design.
c. A competitive theory : When similar products ere manufactured by number of
firms,the customers have choice or multiple sources for supply and hence they will make
competitive comparison and the plant managers may feel that they have no alternative but to
face the competition with other simitar firms
d. An excellence theroy : This was generally held by top mariagement and sales
organisation who warited the company to be known as “Quality House” but without knowing
whether an excellence level would cost more or less than other levels and-whether it will
result in increased profit or otherwis
2. The pattern of customer relation : This includes the extent of advertising truthfully,
the extent of guarantees of the product, and the ‘extent of rigidity or flexibility in setting
customer”s claims for defectives.
3. The extent of leadership in adopting to recognize,and meet customer quality needs, For
example, miaking maintance free goods, market survey, and leadership in solving such quality
problems of customers,
4, The pattern of vendor relations :
i Personal i. Entertainment
iil, Visits iv, Contractual Obligations etc,
5, The extent of use of impersonal methods of supervision i.e. objectives, planning,
reports, goals, charts, controls, audits etc. as agasint personal supervision,
Q.6. Explain the meaning of quality specification and its need.
Ans : A specification is a definition of design: The design remains a concopt in the mind of
the designer until he defines it through verbal description, sample drawing etc. As already
explained, the demands of the application are translated into the requirements and the
requirements are quantified, These quantified requirement are called specifications.
The specificatiovis thus contains the list of esserital characteristics and theif toletaices.
‘The subject matter of quality specifications may include :
1, Tho material specifications, (e.g. components, ingredients and finished products)
2. Process specifications.
3. Method of Test.
4, Criteria for acceptance and rejection.
5. Method of use.
6. Complete programmes.
One specification may be sufficient or separate specifications may be necessary to
describe the desired quality characteristics in the material, product etc.for the same
strength life
Once a definition is available any one of the parties in the industry can communicate any
other and use shorthand of the specification to define a complex product. A buyer can ord:
[Link],392 blower or 2 ton of steel per specification No. EN 32, and in tach case gellet wi
understand what is the exact requirement of buyer. With the help of specifications, the pro-
duction departments will know what materials, machines, tools are to be used and what to
make, the receiving inspector of the buying company will know what to test for and so on.
‘Thus, the need for specification can be summarised as, Need for specifications :
1, Ithelps the manufacturing department to know what exactly is to be produced.
2. The taw materiel, process, equipment, skili etc. required to produce the product of
designed quality. 8
3. To doseriminate between defective and nondefective products.
4, Todecide test standards, inspection and test devices required,
5. To decide what is the exact requirement of the buyer.
Q.7.. Name the various types of specifications.
. Ans ; The various types of specification may be of the following types :
1, Standard specifications.
2, Consumer specifications.
3. Company specifications.
4, Process specifications.
5. Test specifications,
Q.8. Deseribe the following types of specifications.
Ans:
1; Standard specifications.
2. Consumer specifications.
3. Test specifications,
1, Standard Specifications : The work of specifications has been greatly simplified by
the growth of standards for materials, components, processes, tests, products etc, Most of the
‘countries have their own Stnadard Bodies, These standard bodies formulate the specifications
for a variety of products. In our country. “Buresu of Indian Standards” (BIS) is the National
Standards Body. There are number of technical committees working within the framework of
BIS for standardising the specifications for consumer's as well as producer's products. The
iembers of this committee are taken from manufacturers, users, research organisations.
Govt. departments of other interested individual experts of organisations. BIS specifications.
are only voluntary not mandatory.
2. Consumer Specifieations +
‘When BIS specifications are not available or not suitable for a particular customer
. needs, the customer provides the specifications to suit his particular needs and the manufac-
turer may agree and, produce the product as per the specifications givén by the customer.Metrology & Quality Control
Test Specification : These normally include :
1. Scope of the test specifications.
2, Purpose of test.
3. Apparatus to be used, i.e. instruments, reagents etc.
4. Method of selection and prepafztion of sample or specimen,
5, Test procedure,
Q.9._ Describe the following.
Ans:
1. Company specifications *
2. Process Specifications .
1. Company Specifications : Where a company manufactures products to its own Speci-
fications due to varied constraints and the customer accepts them, the specifications may be
called company specifications, :
Contract specifications are the specifications decided by contract reached [Link]
‘manufacturer and customer, Those specifications are the compromise between the consumer
specifications and company or manufdcturing specifications, ‘
Product and materials specifications :
L, Specification Identification : This includes the name of the product, a number which
serves as shorthand description, date and issue number étc,
2: Product description : This describes the product completely, utilizing shorthand
designations, e.g. make; size, grade, number of components and their description etc,
All divisions (departments) have something to contribute to the decision of what should be
the characteristic of the product. Sales presents the vieiw of the customers, Design presets
she technical limitations. Manufacturer presents the cost and personnel limitations. The final
design specification is property a composite ofthese and other views, |
2. Process Specifications : itis necessary to specify the process to produce the par
ticular product with the specified quality, The evidence of conformance to the specifications,
also evidence of conformance to the process s} ecified quality. The evidence of conformance
to the product specification.
The process specifications commonly include :
Specification identification.
Material used, identified by their shorthand designation and quantities of each,
Sequence of operations to be performed.
Description of each operation, including machines and tools to be used.
Process conditions to be maintained to produce the product with stated quality (time
cycle, temperature, préssure, humidity ete.), "
© 6 Process testing to be perfomred-test of process acceptance: +
re
yawQuality Function Ea
Q.10. Define inspection. Describe the objectives of inspection.
‘Ans : Inspection means checking of the material, products or components of product at vari-
ous stages in manufacturing,
The inspection act always includes:
1. The interpretation of a specification,
2, Mensurement of the product.
3. Comparision of I. and 2. to check whether the product conforms to the set standards
or nat.
Objectives of Inspection :
1. Receiving Inspection : Inspection of incoming materials and purchased parts to
ensure that they are according to the required specifications.
2. Inprocess Inspection : Inspection of raw materials as it undergoes processing from
ome operation to another. This will help to isolate the faulty semi-finished goods before
it enters for the next operation,
3: Finished good Inspection 176 inspeit the final finished product (after assembly) to
detect the defects and its sources. It may aio be necessary to garry out the functional
test to ensure that the product functions properly.
4. To Maintain Customer Relations : [Link] that no faulty or defective product
reaches the customers.
8. Gauge Maintenance : Control and maintenance of measuring instruments and
inspection gauges.
6. Test Equipment Maintenance : To maintain the equipment, (e.g, profile projector,
ultrasonic Maw detector, ol makers microscope, strength tester etc.)
7. Decision on salvage : Itisnecessary to take decision on the defective patts. [Link]
these parts may be made acceptable after minor repairs
Q.11. Define inspection planning. Suggest the inspection stations for the fairly big
manufacturing industry.
Ans : Inspection planning is a part of planning for quality It includes.
1. Selection of inspection stations and,
2. The planning of activities at each inpection station
3. Selection of inspection plan,
4, Decision on requirements of tools. gauges & test devices required for inspection.
‘The most appropriate places for inspection stations are :
|. Atreceipt of goods from vendors usually called vendor inspection.
During the progress of high quality or expensive operations
3. Upon completion of all fabrication operations called finished good Inspection
Before completing and irreversib's, expensive operations (e.g. pouring a melt of steel)
At natural peepholes inthe process, sometimes it may be necessary to carry out the
inspection at vendor’s plant.Ro “Metrology & Quality Controt
Altematively the difference between Inspection & Quality Control can be stated more
precisely as follows :
L [Link]. Parameters | Inspection [Quality Control
1 [Scope Inspection is & part of Quality controlis a broad terin, i
quality control. involves inspection at particular
stages, but mere inspection does
notmean quality control.
2, | Definition | Inspection is an act of ‘QC. is an effective system for
checking materials, parts, | integrating quality development,
components or productsat | quality maintenance and quality
various stages in manufac- | improvement efforts of various
turing and sorting outthe —_| groups in an organisation to enable
faulty or defective items’ | the production to be carried out at
from good items, most economical level and to
achieve satisfaction of customers.
3. ]Devices —_| Inspection uses precision | Q.C, uses devices such as statistics,
‘measuring instruments controt charts, acceptance sampling,
such as vernier callipers, | process capability study, V.Q.R.,
micrometers etc. and ‘VR. Quality audits, field complaints
devices such as tool
iakers, microscope,
profile projector, flaw
detector ete, .
4, | Applicability | Inspections concerned with } Q.C. is concerned with quality of
quality of past production to | furure production, For example, take
judge conference with spe- asample, inspect it, ifitis defective
cifications and sorting out | find out the reasons and take
defective items from good | corrective action so that such type
items, of defects will not occur in future.
‘What is learned from inspee-
tion is used as a basis to ascertain
whether the quality of products to be
produced willmmect the specifications
oritis necessary to make changes
in production process.
5. {Concern . | Inspection is mainly the — | Everbody working in an organisation
responsibility of the istesponsible for quality of products
inspectors. produced.[ass + For any manufacturing organisation, both inspection and quality control are essential
However, there is a marked difference between the two. Quality control is a broad term, it
involves inspection at particular stage but mere inspection does not mean quality control.
Inspection is an act of checking materials product or components at various stages and
detecting and sorting out the fqulty oF defective items.
Inspection is concerned with the quality of past production. For example, if the production
schedule calls for manufacturing 1,000 spindles with a diameter of 50 4 0.05mm the inspector
i will concern himself ouly with whether the spindles produced meet this specification. Those
| that do not will be rejected and will continve until 1000 good tinits have been produced, As
opposed to inspection, quality control [Link] with the quality of future production. For
{ example, as the spindles are being produced periedic samples may be taken form the output
and spindles in each sample inspected, If the quality of the items in a perticular sample is
satisfactory, production will be allowed [Link]. But if it is not, corrective action may be
immediately taken. This action may invalve adjusting the machine, eliminating defects in raw
materials, instructing or replacing the operator, selection of better machine etc.
In brief, what is learned from inspection of a sample of the product is used as a basis to
ascertain whether the quality of the products produced will beas per the specifications or it is
necessary to make changes in the productios processes. Hence, in shor, in inspection quality
of past production is ascertained, and in quality control quality of future production is regu-a.. *
lated. Secondly, inspectiorris merely an act of checking and sorting out the deféctive items
whereas quality control is a broad term which includes number of activities (including inspec-
tion) in order to build up and regulate the quality of product.
Q.13. Explain the meaning of quality of design and state the factors controlling it.
Ans : Quality of Design :- The quality of design of a product is concerned with the
tightness of specification for the manufacture of the [Link] example,a part which has a
drawing tolerance of 0,601 mm would be considered to have a better quality of design than
another with a tolerance of 0.01, mm.
The factors controlling the quality of design are :
1. Type of customers in the market.
2, Intended life, enviornmental conditions, retiablity, Importance of continuity of service,
3. Profit considerations.
4, Special requirements of the product such as strength, fatigue resistance, life,
interchangeability of manufctue of item etc. .
5. Economic considerations and feasibility.
Q.14, Explain the term quality of peformance and the factors which controls it.
Ans : The quality of performance is concemed with how well the manufectured product
gives its Performance.see ere ee
i Metrology & Quality Control
Itdepends upon:
. Quality ofdesign and,
b. Quality of conformance.
It can be a best design possible but poor conformance control can cause poor perfor-
mance, conversely the best conformance control can not make the product funtion correctly if
the design itself is not right. i
Ifthe quality of performance ofthe product is not good customer's complain and returns
will increase. It badly affects the reputation of the firm and the sale’s volume of the product.
Q.15. What is the meaning of quality of conformance? state the requirements for
good quality of conformance.
‘Ans : The quslity of conformance is concerned with hoiv well the manufactured. Product,
conforms to the quality of design. :
For good quality of conformance with the design the following factors are important.
1. The raw material, machines,tools, measuring instruments should be of adequate quality
. and should be maintained properly, q
2. - A proper process should be sclecied,and their should be adequate process control
during manufacturing,
3. Operators should be well rained and experinenced.
4, Proper care should be taken in shipment and storage of finished goods.
‘5. Inspection programme should be planned properly.
Q.16, Discuss the statement “Higher quality of design means higher costs, quite
often if also means higher values”. 5
Ans : The quality of design of a product is concerned with the tightness of the specifications
for the manufacture of the product, Therefore, high quality of
design means closer tolerances, The relationship betwoen tolerance
and cost of manufacture is shown in the fig 1.1.
As the tolerances are made closer and closer the cost of
production goes on incressing, because to manufacture the
components with close tolerance we need :
Tolerance—+ 1. Precision machines, tools, materials, etc,
Fig10.1 2. Trained and highly skilled operators,
Tight inspection and good inspection and testing devices,
. Closer tolerances : Manufacture of the parts with closer tolerances needs more
Eoncentration, frequent checks therefore the rate of production also decreases,
5, Close supervision is essential.
However, higher quality of design increases the grade of the product, by providing
additional features in the product such as reliability, appearce, interchangebility, luxury fea-
tures, versatality ete, This helps to increase the utility of the product and thus increases the
Cost
awvalue of the product. With superior quality of design the company can eam higher share of
|_ market, firmer prices, few returns and complaints from the customers, less scrap and rework
i ete
| Qt. Explain the concept of Reliability in details,
{Ans + Reliability is ordinarily associated with the performance of the product. However, there
‘would be litle point in having [Link] lamp which may light at the time of purchase but
which may bum off after 200-hours of use, Whenever the customer purchases a product he
expects that it should give satisfactory performance over a reasonably long period, hence,
what is importantis that a product should function and continue to function for a reasonable
time
In practice, in majority of the cases it may not be possible 1o test each and every product
for its life or other performance requirements, Neverthless, itis a well known experience that
coch individual unit of product varies from the other units, some may have relatively longer
life, In viow of the existence of this variation there would always be a chance or probability
that the product would function in-the intended mannor for the intended length of time.
More specifically, “Reliability is the probability of a product functioning in the intended
‘manner over its intended tife under the environmental conditions encountered.
From this defination, there are four factors associated with reliability. These are,
1. Numerical Value: 2. Intended function,
3. Life, 4, Environmental conditions,
‘Tho intorduction of this element of probability really makes the quantitative measurement
of reliability possible, In other words such measurements help to make reliability @
number - a probability that ean be expressed as a standard
They make it possible to ojbectively evaluate the reliability to predict it and-to balance
itwith the other quality requirements, such as maintainability and appearance,
‘The second consideration for a product to be reliable is that it must perform a certain
function or do a certein job when called upon, The phrase functioing in the intended manner
(satisfactory performance) implies that the device is intended for certain application. For
example, in the case of electric iron, the intended application is that of applying intended
degree of heat to the various types of fabrics. If'instead it is used to keep a room at a certain
temperature, the electric iron might be inadequate because of the greater atea to be heated
and the change in environment. ,
‘The third element in the definition of reliability is that of time which ensures that the
product is capable of working satisfactorily throughout the expected life, Many companies
frequently concentrate on testing their product atthe start only [Link] not evaluate the per-
formance at the various stages during the life of the product. As a result they experience
extremely difficult reliability problems when their increasingly complex products are put to
use bythe consumers. .Leto cy & Quit Contra]
‘The fourth consideration in the definition is that of the environment conditions which.
have to be viewed broadly so as to include storage and transport conditions. Since these
conditions too have significant effect on product reliability.
Q.18. Give some important definitions of Reliability, what is the main cause of un-
reliability?
Ans : Many formal definitions of reliability have been proposed that are similar in their
general intent but differ a bit in their exact phrasing, Some of the other definitions are as
follows:
“Reliability is the probability of a device performing its purpose adequatly for the period of
time intended under the operating conditions encountered,”
The realibility of asystem or device, is the probability that it will give satisfactory perfor
mance for a specified period of time under specified conditions.”
Reliability of a product is “ a measure of the ability of the product to function successfully,
when required for the required period in the specific manne.”
Stated simply, “reliability is the capability of an equipment not to breakdown in operation,”
When an equipment works well, and works whenever called updn to do the job for which it
is designed, such equipment is said to be reliable.
Failureis defined as the inability ofan equipment not to breakdown in operation.
“Reliabitity may also be defined as the probability of no failure throughout a prescribed
operating period.”
‘The causes of unreliability of the product are many one of the major causes is the :nereas-
ing complexity of product, The multiplication law of probability illustrates this vory simply.
Given an assembly made up of five components, each of which has a reliability of function of
0.95, the reliability of function of assembly is (0.95)$ or about 0.78, Many assemblies which
are electronic in nature involve thousands of parts (a ballistic missile-has more than 40,000
parts). Therefore, to have reasonable chance of survival for such assemblies the components
reliability is of prime importance,
Q.19. State the basic elements of Reliability.
Ans : Basic Elements of Reliability ar
‘The basic elements required for an adequate specification or definition of reliability are as
follows:
1. Numerical value of probability.
2. Statement defining successful product performance.
3. Statement defining the environment in which the equipment must operate,
4, Statement of the required operating time,
5.. The type of distribution likely to be encountered in reliability measurement, Relisbility
follows the distribution of Poisson e = T/9.
Where, @ = meanlife
T = sequired lite.Q.20, State the effective areas to be considered for the achievement of reliability.
Ans : There are five effective areas for the achievement of reliability of the product. They
are:
i Design, j, Measurement and testing
ii, Production ix, Maintenance and,
. Field operation,
Design is the main cause of unreliability and a greater percentage of causes of unreliability
can be traced out in this area.
Q,21, Differentiate between Quality Contre! and Reliability,
Ans : Quality Contro} and Reliability : Quality control maintains the consistency of
the product and thus affeets reliability. But it is entirely a separate function. Reliability is
associated with quality over the long term where as quality control is associated with the
relatively short period of time, required for manufacture of the product. The task of reliability
is to see that in a product design, full account has been taken of every contingency which may
cause a breakdown in sé and to forecast the components of assembleis that are likely to
become defective in service, However well, the equipment is designed, sill it may be unreli-
able, if some component has not been fully evaluated under all service conditions, even ifthe
production standards have been maintained by quality control during manufacture. Fig:13.1
shown the intergration of quality and reliability function,
Q.22, Explain the need of reliable product?
‘Ans : The reliability of asystem, equipment or product is very important aspect of quality for
its consisterit performance over its expected life span, In fact, uninterrupted service and haz-
ard free operation is the essential requirement of large complex system like electric power
generation and distribution plants or communication network such as railways, aeroplane;
automible vehicles etc. In these cases a sudden failure of even a single component, assembly
‘or system results in a health hazard, accident, or interruption in continuty ofservece. |
‘Thermal power plants provide electric power for domestic, commercial, industrial and ag-
ricultural-use, Reliability problems may enuse shut down or reduced generation of power
resulting in load shedding arid many other problems including loss of productive activities:
Failure of any one system of an air-craft may result in forced landing or an accident.
Sudden stoppage of subruban railway train dive to fault in the single system faulty carriage,
interruption in the power supply or faulty track, sets up a chain of event leading to distruption
of service os accident.
Simitarly, sudden-failure of a car break system while it is running may cause severe
accident,
_ Unpredicted failure of a single critical component may be cause of any one of the above,
What is true of power plants, air-crafis, railways etc. is also true for other products like
washing machine, mixer grinder, T.V. sets Refrigerators etc, though failure of stich products
‘May cause incovenience on a smaller scale.equipment design, control of quality during manufacture, acceptance inspection field trials,|f
life testing and design modifications. é
‘Therefore, deficiencies in design and manufacture of products which go'to build such com
corrected by a planned programms of maintenance,
Q.23. Define the term maintainability. State the relationship between maintenance j
and Reliability. 5
Ans : Maintenance and Reliability : Approximately tice the original cost of complex}
equipment is expended each year to support the equipment. Much of this cost is the result o
up-keep and maintenance, The total reliability of the equipment in the field is a function'a
design, maintenance and field operation reliability ;thatis,
RF =/(D, M, FO)
‘Maintenance is a production typo of activity at or near the place of use, which is
confined to repair or replacement of failed, marginal or time change units.
Maintainability :“Maintainability” is defined as the probability that a device will be restored
to its operational effectiveness within the given period; wher maintenance action is performed
in acordance with the prescribed procedure.
‘Maintenance action is the prescribed operation to correct an oquipmont failure,‘Quality Assurance
Chapter
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1 Q.t. Define the term "Quality Assurance Function". Describe briefly the stages
involved in’Total Quality Assurance. State the advantages of Quality assurance?
Ans : "Quality assurance engineering" deals with assuring the desired quality, reliability, service
and other aspects in the manufactured product, through scientific techniques. The job of
evaluating the companys activities with respect to quality, reporting the results of evaluation
to all concemed for information and necessary action, and the subsequent action takes is
called as "Quality Assurance Function".
‘The three stages in consideration of total quality assurances are
1. Design Stage : To check and ensure whiether the quality of design is according to the
needs of the maximum number of customers.
2, Manufacturing Stage : To check end ensure whether the quality of the menufactured
products conforms to design specifications, :
3. Fleld Observations : (Reliability and performance analysis, observing the
perfoimanice in actual field, studying and analysing the preformance, maintenance,
life etc in view of improvement in the product in the next manufacturing cycle, There
fore,
Total Quality Assurance = Quality of design + Quality of manufacturing conforming
to design + Quality ofperformance
Advantages of Quality Assurance :
. Fewer defects.
Fewer customer's complaints.
Better Quality.
Lass scrap.
. Good customer relations.
5. Higher productivity.
. Less inspection reject,&
AGS 0 2, What is "Quality Mindness” ? How does it help ia improving the quatity of t
product ? too
Ans : Quality Mindness : The term quality mindness means person's attitude toward
quality. It is actually a state of mind in which the awareness of quality ig constantly prese:
Every one working in the organisation or all departments are responsible forthe broad quality
function Therefore, to maintain quality or to improve quality it is necessary’to stress th
importance of quality in the minds ofthe various persons working the the organisation (Mi
foremen, supervisors, workers etc). Quality mindnessis also called as quality-consciousnes
or quality awareness.
Quality mindness helps to achieve the desired results with a minumum of tsk; man hot
materials and time. The principle fosce for meeting the quality lies not in the gauge:
instruments or other facilities for inspection. ItTies in the state of mind of the persons workin
in the organisation, from the top executive down to the worker. The most expensive equipment
‘can not produce quality products ifhandled by the person who lacks quality mindness. Quali
mindness of the personnel in the firm is an index of the firms quality.
Quality mindness helps to achieve the spiral
whole A of progress in quality ss explained belw.
insintenonce oT 1, With the help of market survey a com pa
Service rca determines; what qualities are needed b
\ Sivke tho customers.
sae ———production.
‘To tap creative intelligence of the persons working inthe organisation and to make full
‘use of the its human resources.
‘To permit employees to develop and use gresier amount of knowledge and sil and
ply to a wide range of challenging task.
‘To improve communication within the organisation. . :
. [Link] employees loyalty and comitment to the organisation and its goals,
. To respect humanity and built happy bright work place environment which is
meaningful to work in.
To enrich human capability, confidence, moral, titude and relationship.
10. To satisfy the huméih needs of recogniition, achievement and self development.
‘Quilty circles are not limited to manufeturing firms only. They are applicable for variety
of organisation where there is a scope for group based solution of work related problems.
Quality circles are thus:relevat for factories, firms, schools, hospitals, universities, reserach
institutions, banks, government office etc. i.e. anyplace where people are involved in the
solution’of problems and development of work.
Q.11, Descirbe the functioning (process of operation) of Quality Circles.
‘Ans’: The basic purpose of quality citcle is to identify and solve work related problems. The
circle members normally meet once a weck for one hour, In the early meetings, timeis devoted
‘mainly to train the circle members. Once they have acquired the fundamental problem solving
and quality analysis techingue they start working on problems. .
‘The operation of quality circles involve a set of sequential steps as under,Problem ‘problem __-Broblem, Generate”
om ” | identification selection Analysis: Altemative
" Solutions
i
+ -
vq ‘Implement resent * prepare select test | *
a ‘thesolution solution to -planof Solution”
2 Management
Fig.t1.2 Process of operation of Quality Circles.
i Steps in Quality Cricle Operation :
1, Problem identification : The eircle members identifies anuinber of problems that
need to be Solved:pertaining to their work area
2. Problem Selection : They-decide thé priority'and select the Problem théy wish 0
take-up first. ~
3. Problem Analysis ; The problem is classified and [Link] basic problem
solving téchaiqued such as :
a. Brain storming b. Pareto diagrams
c. Cause ad Effect diagram — d, Data collection
4. Generate Alternative Solutions : Identify and evaluate causes and generate number
of possible alternative solutions, |
S, Select the most appropriate solution : At this stage the circle numbers discuss
% and evaluate the alternative solutions by comperison in investment and the return from
the Solution under the existing circumstances,
na 6. Prepare plan-of Action : The circle numbers then prepare plan of action for making
é the sotution reality. The action plan includes the critical examination .¢: the. consideration
of who, what, when, where, how and why of solving problems,
i 7. Present solution io Management : the Circle membeis present the solution and
uy action plan to the management for approval,
8. Implementation of solution : The management then evaluate the recommended
hy solution. Depending upon the nature and magnitude of the problem, a small scale
pilot test run may be essential before a full scale implementation of the solution is
attempted.
‘Once a solution is successfully tested and approved itis implemented ona full scale atthe
earliest, A decision should be communicated to quality circie generally in two weeks,
: The cycle of circle functioning is repeated as they solve one problem and begin work on
another. >QUALITY ECONOMIES
Q.1. Explain the meaning of 1. Cost of Quality: ii. Valué of quiality.
Ans +4, Cost of Quality : The-cost of carrying out thé company's quality functions (Greeting
the quality tieeds of the customers} sre known as costs of quality.
This includes : 1. Market research costs of discovering the quality iéds of the customers.
2: The product research and development costs of creating product concept which will
meet these quality needs.
3. The design cost of translating the product coiicept into information; which permits
‘planning for manufacture,
The cost of manufacturing planning in order to meet required quality specifications.
Cost of inspection and test, .
Cost of defect prevention.
Costof scrap, quality failures.
Cost of quality assurance:
Field service and such other functions attributed to the quality improvement and
maintenance,
‘Value of Quality : With superior quality the company can eam higher shere of market, firmer
prices, few returns and complaint form the customers. Its this effect on income which makes
quality to have value. Hence, value of quality can be defined as the return direct or indirect
gained by the manufactures due to missions of quality control:
‘Value of quatity is composed of :
1. Value inherent in the design :
2. Valueinherent in the conformance to that design,
The value inherent in the design is usually called as "grade", Grade is the variation in
specifications for the same functional use: Difference in grade may involve diffvences in :
Life of the product Extent of maintenance required
Appéarance Reliability
Interchangebility LLaxury features
ven aeMetrology & Quality Control
Factor of safety - Ease of installation or use
Ability to take occasional overloads etc,
As arulo, higher quality of design means higher costs. Quite often it also means higher
values.
Itis comparatively easy to evaluate the cost of quality but itis difficult to assess the value
of quality , as the information is widely scattered.’ *
The value of quality is to be assessed considering various factors, a few of which are as
1. The saving due to incréaseé production, 8
Reduction in scrap and re-work cost.
Increased sales of good quality product
Indirect factors such as :
Pryeoloicl sain he etre di tlncrened sales and sce fobeto
tit
Qa ty sinh eee toast uy ave of sy?
Explain,
OR
Explain the meaning of opti quality of design with the help of graph.
Ans : The balance between the cost of
‘quality and value of quality gives optimum.
‘quality of design.
‘From company's point of view profit -
ality of. ofdesign involes
“Market Survery While carrying out "-
market survey expécté sale for particular
quality, profit and competition in the
market is tobe considered, The quality of
design should meet the needs of the
customer and at the same time its manu
facturing cost should besuch that it will
Fig. 12.1 Balance between Cost yield maximum profit: The aim should
of quality and value of quality. be to improve quality at lower cost.
‘The curves representing the cost and value of quatity of design are shown in figure, 12.2 If
‘we want to improve the quality of design from point 1 to point 2 the cost of quality will
increase by amount A. Where as the value of quality will increase by an amount B. Now B>A.and therefore, improvement in quality at this level will yield more income.
However, ifthe quality is to be improved from the point 2:o point 3 then fromthe figure 1.3
D
‘Ana : The orgaiantion for quality function should eater to ativiesreatd to
ook i Planing to uatiy (prevention)
Monitoring and control of quality and
ii, 1-tnpannenee cgay @oomrece changes)
‘The quality organisation is responsible for:
4, Co-ordinating the activities of design, purchasing, Engineering, production, Finance,
product development and service function by forming a Quali it °
b. Utilise the experts from statistical process control, reliability, technical experts and
other functiona! areas by forming a task group for quality improvement,
¢, Report on quality cost, identify problems and implement quality improvement process.
Identify training needs and co-ordinate with training function to implement quality.
Q.2. Givea typical organisation for quality,
Ans : ‘The following chart shows a typical quality control organisational chart on level with
the production organisation: In this type improcess quality is a responsibility of shops.
“Quality Manager
ne Chief inspector Quality Control
us Acceptance Engineer
Fig. 13.1 Organisation for quality furiction,
[Production Manager
Quality Assurance
EngineerQ.3. What do you mean by manufacturing planning for, quality ‘TState the quality
aspects of planning for manufacture:
+ Planning Consists of utilizing prior knowledge to control future events. It comsists of
preparations necessary to carry out the objectives of the company, Planning starts with clear
objectives and ends when everything is ready for execution, Planning for manufacture constists
of the activities required to put factory inreadiness to meet its standard of quality, cost and
delivery dates.
‘The specific quality aspects of planning for manufacture includes :
1. Choice of machines, processes and tools capable of mesting the specified tolerances.
2 Choice of measuring instruments, eauges and other inspection devices adequate to
control the process. .
4, Planning the flow of manutactring information and inspection criteria,
4, Planning of process quality controts. .
5,. Selection and training of production personnel. : .:
6 Planning the quality aspects of packing and shipping." <
Q:4. What do you mean by planning through trial lots 2 why is it necessary 7 State
its Timitations?
‘Ang + Planning through tial lots means to plan ofly for ti lots before planning for full scale
production. The manufacture may desire to introduce a new manufacturing process, complete
new functional features and large investment, for such product prior knoweledge is not available
on which the production can be planned. Such product involes a serious risk for the company
ifthe planning goes wrong. Hence, for such products it is necessssary to plan for trial lots
before planning for full scale production. The trial lots after production are introduced in the
market and the reactions of the customers, their complaints regarding the functional and other
aspects of the product are carefully studied. *
Therefore, trial lot is used to clear the track for full scale production, for the following
reasons: . :
1, To engure’that the tools and processes selected are capable of producing this
products economically.
2.. Providing om test, thatthe product possesses the essential functional qualities.
“3, Providing on use, that the produét will achieve the intended field of performance and
is acceptable to the custothers.
4, To trace out the deficiencies in provess or product which should be corrected before
starting full scale production.
Limitations of trial lots :
1. Tho time required for trial lots is considerably large, there is « delay in starting the
production.
2. The cost is high, and hence it may be economical only for large scale production.SSP RSS. 23 25
ee
Q.S. List out the activities involved in
[Link], [Link], 3. Assurance as the funétion of quality contro
OR
‘What are the three main element of quality function ? Explain.
Ans : I, Acceptance Function : The term "acceptance’ is the activity of making decisior
on whether the product, materials tools, etc are acceptable for use or not.
The product aceptance consists of Acceptance of
i Purchased goods.
i, Goods in process, when the raw material undergoes processing,
i, Finished goods. * *
In addition to above inpsection activities such as :
1, Maintenance of gauges, measuring instruments.
2. Storage and disposal of non-acceptable products.
~3. Recording the data are also grouped with acceptance functions.
2, Prevention Function : It is based on the principle that itis better to prevent defects
from happening than to cure them,
The defect prevention consists of
1. Planning new products, processes, procedures, etc. Such that the defecs are avoided
in the first place, itself,
2. Eliminating the defects as they arise:
3 Take suitable actions to avoid the occurance of such defects in future,
Satistical quality contro! is the important device for defect prevention The defect
prevention activities include
i. Economic studies i, Process capability studies,
iil, Design of experiments, iv, design of sampling plans,
¥. Analysis of data vi, Training in quality control.
3. Assurance Function : Quality assurance function deals with assuring the desired!
quality, reliability, service and other aspects in the manufactured product, through scientific
techniques.
The job of evaluating the company’s activities with respect to quality, reporting the results
‘of evaluation to all concerned for information and necessary action, and the subsequent action
taken is called as quality assurance function. The activities assigned to the assurance function
usually include,
1. Processing of the field complaints.
2 Quality rating of outgoing product.
3. Quality survey or audit,
4. Brepartion of executive report on quality.
5, Setting up quality levels.‘Quality Organisation ps |
6 Inspection planning. =
7, Market quality determination,
8° Disposition of non-conforming products,
In short the activities involved in three main elements, acceptance, prevention, aisurance
can be listed as follows:
Tospection ‘Quality Control ‘Quallty Assurance
Receiving inspection | Economicstudies Field complaints.
Inprocess inspectionProcess capability studies - Quslftyrating of outgoing.
Finished good inspection | Design of Experiments Products Quality survey or
Gauige maintanance Analysis of Data audit, 3
Testequipment Design ofsampling plans | “Preparation of Executive
maintenance Statistical Techniques report on Quality
Storage and disposal of | such as control charts to | Setting up quality levels.
non acceptable product | be used and their Inspection planning
etc, frequency Market Quality determination,
Training in quality
Control etc. Disposition of non:
. comforming products,
Depreciated equipment,
: tools etc.
Acceptance Function ‘Prevention Function Assurance Function
Q.6, Expalin the need-of organisation for co-ordination in'an industry. How is it
achieved ? or justify the statement quality is everybody's business.
Ans ¢ Every porson working in the industry is responsible in the task of obtaining satisfactory
quality. The salesman who sells the product, production engineer, took enginet, purchase officer,
production, machine operator, inspector, personnel who trains the employees everybody has
his own contribution in maintaining or improving the quality of the poroducts. Ifthe work of
‘any person in the organisation goes worng, it will affect the quality of the product produced
and the efforts of all other will be'in vain. Thus there is hardly a single individual in'the entire
‘company who in one way or the other does not contribute to the quality of the company's
product or services, Thus itis rightly said that quality is everybody's business. This fact ean
'be explanined clearly with the help of spiral of progress in quality. (Refer fig, 2.1 Question
number 5...)
From the above discussion it is necessary to co-ordinate the efforts of all these individuals
for building up and maintaining quality of product,
‘The Co-ordination in various groups may be achieved by various means such as :
1. Co-ordination through a common boss which forms a link and whose decision is final
to be followed by all concemed.2. Self Co-ordination i.e. to leave it to individual supervisors to identify the need for
co-ordination as they arise and to conduct a meeting of whatevey people are needed
tosolve the qualty problems.
_ 3) Co-ordination through written procedure.
Co- ordination through staff specialists.
5. Co- ordination through joint committes (Quality improvement commitee, Quality
motivation committee and engineering change committee etc.)
Q.7. What is defect prevention ? State its objectives.
*
happening than to cure them, Defects in the poducts manufactured do not just happen thes
have causes. A few defects account for the majority of losses,
The defect prevention activities consist of :
1. Planning new products and processes such that defects are avoided in the first place
itself. Before they occur and make the product defective.
2.. Eliminating defects as they arise.
This involves :
1. Establish correct level of performance,
2. Establish measure of current performance,
3. Collect data on current performance,
4. Compare the current performance and expected performance.
5. Take suitable action to eliminte difference to maintain the quality of futire production.
Objectives of defect prevention :
1. Toprevent ihe defects from occuring in the first place. This helps to reduce serap,
sework and also the cost of production.
2. Ifthe defects are detected as soon as they occur it saves the man hour, machine hours
which would have been wasted while working on already defective products,
3. Ithelps to maintain the reputation of the firm and increases the demand for the}
+ product in the market.
_ 4 Itincreases the competitive strength of the firm with rivel companies producing similar
products,
Q.8. State the functions of a quality control engineer (magager) in an industry.
Ans : The function of the quality control engineer can be listed as :
1. Draft a company’s policy on quality.
2. Draft the company's major quality objectives.
3. Establish optimum quality of design. : ~
+4. Conduct quality audit and surveys, = |
5. Co-ordinate the preparation and execution of the quality plans including the tasks
Tequifed during design, drafting purchasing, manufacturing and usage of the products :dj
6. Conduct process capability and machine capability studies.
7, Design of sampling plans, control charts and other statistical techniques.
8, Approve design of gauges, inspection and test devices. :
9, Prepare job specifications for selecting and training of personnel for quality matters.
10. Plan and allot the quality functions to various persons in the department.
"11, Collaborate in disposition ofnon- conforming products and materials.
12, Recommand new quality objectives based on consumers need.
13, Collaborate with poroduction, purchase; and other departments in solving quality
problems and in matters requiring a team apporach.
14, Keep informed on new industrial developments in ispection methods, processes,
materials, satistical techniques and other-matters affecting quality of the products.
Q.9. Define Quality system state its importance. -
‘Ans 1 Quality system + To assure quality one has to ensure the quality. To ensure quality it,
is necessary to adopt a standard procedure and to make systematic control at every stage and
to take critical review of efforts and schioversns of compeny with respect to. quality of the
produc.
‘A comprehensive quality sytem covers = all dspects of company’s operation ftom the
preparation of tenders to the eventual delivery. Installation and commissioning of products
and also its after sales servicé.
According to Dr. Feiginbaum, “A total. quality system is the agreed companywide and
plantwide operating work structure documented in-an effective and integral technial and
ranageral procedures for guiding the co-ordinated efforts best and most practical ways to
ensure customer quality satisfaction and economical costs of quality.”
‘Through the adaption and implementation pf formal documented procedures, the system
imposes discipline upon all aspects of company's operations with a view to ensuring that each
task is performed correctly, first time and every time consistently. This will [Link],
cutting waste by reducing rejections and scrap on the shop floor, It will also lead to prompt
delivery by reducing detays to minimuin; Hence operating efficiency will improve resulting in
animprovement in overall profitability.
Q.10, Explain the term total Quality Control.
Ans ; Total Quality Control : As already defined in Charpter 1, “Total Quality Control” is
an effective system of intergrating qulity development, quality maintenance and quality
improvement efforis of the various groups in an organisation, so as to enable production and
services at the most economical levels, which allow full customers satisfaction.
Total Quality Control gives stress on prevention of defects rather than setting it right by
rectification. ‘The concept of total quality is different from product quality. It ineliudes product
quality and much more. Its approach towards quality is in all its forms in. perople andprocesses, in products and costs, in planning and management, All the operations of a company
market research, the needs of the customer, the optimal use of raw materials and other inputs,
products development and design, manufacturing process, sales, service after sales the whole
of it comprise total quality. .
Total quality con be achieved orly through total Employee Involvement Itstarts with people.
Total quality comes from employees creativity, team work, participation, continuous
improvement, leadership, motivation etc.
There are six identifiable phases to achieve Total Quality control.
Comprehension 2. Commitment
Competence. 4, Communication
Correction 6 Continuance,
Comprehension : What is quality it should be definable and measurable,
Commitment ; clarity of concepts and policies, organisation fort;
Competence : Develop method, tests, procedures to evaluate quality, understand the
price of non-conformance to quali
Communication : Create awareness, resolve conflicts, co-ordinate activities, ereate an
image of product quality and reliability.
5. Correction : Solve problems ofinon-Conformanca, Problems are largely due to lack
of knowledge or lack of facilities.
6, Continuance : Maintain its importance, ensure exposure to sustained programmes,
innovation (Introduction of new methodes, techniques).
‘TQC covers the above concepts and envelops all activities of product quality such as
product design, product development, proto-type development and testing, manufacturing
planning, production and insérvice performance, testing and training etc,
It provides feedback at vatiouis stages for comparison with standards and for initiating
‘htrol action to bring about modification and changes at appropriate stages. It involves all
departments at various levels and provides for interaction, co-ordination and monitoring of
various activities through prompt comrmutiication and control system,
Q.11. Define T.Q.M. State how it can be ensured.
Ans: “
‘Total Quality Management (TQM) :
Definition 1. Total Quality Management refers to the total involvement of staff in an
‘organisation together, which inclades suppliers, distributors and even customers
in bringing about quality satisfaction by promoting quality cultures througitquality circles, job
enrichment and effective purch: y. Workers and supervisors have to be trained to solve the
problems in product/process variations.
we a
a[[Qualiy Organisation ma
2. “According to Prof. Leopatd S. Vasin, “TQM is the control of all transfortnetion
processes of an organisation to best satisfy customers needs in the most economical
manne”.
‘The management can‘ensure this through
a. Team Effrot.
" b. Satistying workers emotional and intellectual needs for better working conditions.
‘The worker's atitude towards his products and their quality is also dependent on the
industrial relations climate in the organisatioa.-If the climate reflects a feeling of fair
ness in personnel decisions, prompt redresse! of grievances and open cummunicatién,
the probability will be high that workers will be responsible and responsive to man
agements auvice. They may develop pride in their organisation and its products. Such
a pride and sense of belongingness will have a great impact on product quality and
productivity,
Installing motivation system, to include collective achiovement and quality excellence.
Integration and co-ordination of activities of various departments such as product
design, R and D, production planning, manufacturing/processing, technical services,
sales etc. to attain the desired goals economically.
. Maintaining a sound quality system, to ensure each task is performed correctly.
All this requires complex changes in productiprocesses to be effectively managed by top
‘management through people involvement, Parameters responsible for product quality and qualty
concepts need to be clearly understood by management ifthe marketed products are to satisfy
the users and a good image of quality is to be developed to strive f6r excellence.
Q.12. What are ISO 9000 series standards ? State its equivalent standards. +.
Ang : ISO : 9000 series of standards on quality system was formulated by International
Organistion for Standardization in order to meet the requirements of internationally uniform
quality system. The European Nation trade has reached en understanding that the post 1992
trade transaction would be dealt only with thése companies who have registered 1S0:9000
quality system.
ISO : 9000 Series Standards in General : International Organisation for Standardization
has developed the following standards on quality systems, the corresponding Indian
standards are given in tie brackets. Fig. 13.2.
1SO ; 9000 quality standards stiputste certain management lines and minimum requirements
for making quality of products and services conforming to the needs of customers, These are
developed for facilitating international exchange of goods and services, Alt these systems are
essentially self-disciplined standards based on the principles of harmonization of specification
and continuous surveiliance by thirds party.Metrology & Quality Control
180:84021 | VOCABULARY
13999) :
1$0:9001 SELECTION AND USE OF QUALITY SYSTEM
GS:14000) STANDARDS
NON-CONTRACTUAL. _ CONTRACTUAL SITUATIONS
SITUATIONS © ~ . °
S0:9004 "QUALITY MGMT]
14004) SYSTEM STDS.
QA. MODEL FOR DESIGN
DEVELOP/PRODN/IN ~
STALLATION AND
SERVICING
|. FOR PRODUCTION: ‘AND
| INSTALLATION
[Link] FOR FINAL
INSPECTION AND
‘TESTING
GUIDELINES FOR
AUDITING QUALITY
SYSTEM. :
| ie14011-3)
“Fig. 13.2 Structure of Quality system Standards,
Q.13. Describe 186 :9000 series in brief .
‘Ans + 180 : 9000 (IS 14000) Quality Management aiid Quality Assurance Standard +
1SO Standard has given different models for adoption which relate to the stage of the
product or service at which the quality of the later needs assurance, This standard gives
_ Buidelines for selection and use of appropriate model.
ISO 9001 : 1987 (IS 14001 : 1988)
‘Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation and
Servicing,
A product or & service has to pass through several stages after itis conceived and before
it is supplied to the customer. Even after it is supplied to the user, 2 necessity may arise to‘Quality Organi my
keep a follow up action; so that the user does not face any problem or difficulties in using the
product ISO : 9001 standard gives a model for quality assurance at all stages starting from
designing the product and continuing even after the product is delivered to the customer.
ISO 9901 applies to industries who design, produce, instal product and provide service
afier sales as per the requirements of [Link]. Some specific examples are heat
exchangers, coolers, filters, extraction columns ete: for process industries,
In'these cases the customer states his application and the supplier works out the final
design, mekes changes if required, A set of specifications is then prepared, after the design
Tequiremerits are mutually agreed. The manufacturer has to open his manufacturing stages to
‘the customer so as to enable the customer to judge the suppliers capability of manufacturing
the product as perhas requirements,
Afler the product is manufactured, and inspected for conformance with specifications it
should be installed by the supplier at the customer's premises and a trial run should be conducted,
Even after installation, the supplier has to. provide necessary services for maintenance of
equipment for trouble-free performance. :
ISO : 9002 : 1987-(1S : 14002 : 1988)
" Moilel for Quality Assurdnce in Production and Installation : Some products require
quality assurance only during production and tll they are delivered ta the customer/or installed
in his premises. 180-9002 gives a model quality assurance for such products. In such cases
the manufacturer given his own design to meet the customers requirement and has to only
prove that production process is capable of producing the product/equipment as per the
requirements of the customer; and that the supplier can install the product/equipment at the
customer's premises satisfactorily. Civil structures, construction of bridges etc. are the
examples. So, this model is applicable where the assurance on quality is required only during
production and upto satisfactory installation.
ISO: 9003 : 1987 (IS 14003 : 1988)
Model for Quality Assurance in Final Tnspeetion and ‘Test : Cenriain products require
quality assurance only after they are manufactured i. at the time of supply. The customer is
ot concerned with how they are manufactured. He is interested only in getting the product of
desired quality as stated by the supplier/or ISO 9003 standard gives amodel of quality assurance
in such cases. Examples of such products are : domestic appliances, pertroleum products,
components used in the assembly of manufacture of bigger items such as automobiles ete,
‘Most of the consumer items also fallin this category.
ISO : 9004 : 1987 (IS 14004 : 1991)
Quality Management and Quality System Elements Guidelines : ISO : 9001, 9002 and
9003 apply where a contract between supplier and contractor exists. In non-contretual|
j
xk °°» ~__ Metrotogy a Quality Controt
situations companies may adopt 180 : 9004 which gives guidelines for quality management.
It is essential to build confidence of the customer that the organisation can supply the
desired quality of the products or services. The organisation has to take serveral integrated
steps in managing all matters which have direct or indirect effect on its image to deliver the
products of desired quality, These integraed efforts of the organisation towards maintaining
the quality culture is Qui management, All these elements of quality management taken
together make the quality system. ISO 9004 ; 1987 gives guidelines comprising different
elements of a quality management system, .
Q.14, Stae the outstanding features of ISO 9000 series standrds.
Ans : Outstanding Features of ISO : 9000 Series of Standards : There are a number of
outstanding features about the ISO 9000 series of quality assurance system standards.
1. The elements if TS0:9000 quality systems are not new. Some or allthe elements are
always under practice by every ogranisation in its business activities. The important
features of ISO : 9000 are the integration of all activities which have a direct or indirect
effect on the quality of a préductor service. The total system of quality is thrown open
for verification by the customer and confidence is builtin him that tie organisation is
capable of delivering the products or services of desired quality.
2. These standards have been formulated by peopole who afe conversant with the
problems and failures which occur in industries.
3, 180: 9000 stndard series tells suppliers and manufacturers whatis required of quality
oriented working system. It does not set out extra special requirements which only a
very few firms can comply with, instead it is a practical standard for quality systems
which can be used by small as well as large organisations.”
4, Itdefings the basic concepts and specifies the procedures and criteria t8 ensure that
the outgoing product meets the customer's requirements.
5,. There are no dictatorial clauses in the standards. In most cases it requires a company
“to establish its own procedures.
6 The standards are designed to be user friendly. They are generic in hature, and follow
logical, easily understood format. They are applicable to every product, let it be a
tooth brush or a nuclear reactor.
TSO : 9000 standards are not compulsory by legistation. They are only voluntary. However,
they give preference over those who do not have ISO : 9000 quality system; since the eustomer
would be sure of the quality he gets.
Q.15, State the advantages and limitations of ISO : 9000,
Ans : Advantages or Benefits of ISO : 9000 :
1. 180: 9000 series of standards énable to meet the requirements of an internationally
uniform quality system.[ Guntity Organisation me
2. It could enhance foreign exchange. So itis important for the industires to adopt ISO :
9600 to compete in the international market,
3. Menables the company to build customer confidence that itis capable of delivering
the products or services of desired quality.
4, Itreduces the need for assessment by multiple buyers. It thus avoids time and money
spent on multiple inspections of products for conformance.
5, Toadopt ISO : 9000 standards it is necessary to establish and maintain sound quality
assurance system, This results in improvernest in efficiency, and redution in inspection;
scrap and rework,
6. Motivates the employees and develops pride in them for achieving excellence,
7. Once SO : 9000 has been adopted it automatically enables the company to contol its
production quality and delivery schedules, cut waste and down time and boost
productivity.
Limitations of ISO : 9000.
There are few disadvantages of ISO : 9000 series standards, these are
1. The implementation of 180:9000 series of standards is very much demanding on
Tesources.
2.. The formulating and documenting of the system is time consuming, and may involve
considerable clerical expenses.
3, Assemssment and registration are also expensive.
4, ‘The need to change attitudes and accept new working practices may strain the
management capability of the company beyond its ability to cope.
Q.16. Define the following terms'as per ISO : 8402 (vocabulary)
i Quality ii Inspection ii, Reliability .
iv, Specification. Quality loop.
Ans : Quality : Quality is the totality of features and characteristics of a product or service
that bear on its ability to satisfy stated ot implied needs,
Inspection : As perISO : 8402, inspection implies the activities such as measuring, examining,
testing, grading one or more characteristics of a product or service and comparing these with
specified requirements to determine conformity:
ty + Realibility is the ability of an iter to perform a required function under stated
conditions for a stated period oftime.
Spicification : The document that prescribes the requirements with which the product or
service has to conform
Quality loop : (Quality spiral ) Ibis the conceptual model of interacting activities that influence
the quality of a product or service in various stages ranging from the indentification needs to
the assessment of whether these needs have been satisfied.ror
Metrology & Quality Cont
‘veage | specineaton Bremer Ag
and Product, Developmen!
Marketing and
ave «Research
Disposal Alter Use Protrement
a Process Planting
‘eetwical_ Assistance
ard Maintenance nd. evelopment
Inataltation. and Production
Oe Inspection Testing and -
Examination
Soles and Cistribution
Fig. 13,3 Quality Loop
Q.17, Define the following terms as per ISO : 8402
i Quality system “ii. Quality Assuranet dil, Quality control
iv. Quality Audit ¥ Quality management — ~ vi., Quality policy.
‘AsperISO : 8402 vocabulary, Quality system is the organisatio
es procedures, processes. and resources for implementing quali
Ans:
structre, resposibi
Quality Assurance + All those planned and systematic actions necessary to provide adequ:
confidence that a product or service will satisfy given requirement for quality
Quality eciitiet i The operational techwtiques and activities that are used to full fill
requirements for quality. , ~
‘Quality Audit : A systematic and independent examination to determine whether quali
activities and related results comply with planned arrangements and whether the:
arrangements are implemented effectively and are suitable to achieve objectives.
Quality Management : The aspects of the oyerall management function that determines}
and implements the quality policy.
Quality Policy : The overall-quelity intentions and direction of an organisation as regards
quality, as formally experssed by top mangement.
Grade : An indicator of category or rank related to features or characteristics that cove:
different sets of needs for products or services intended for the same functional use,Quality Organisation
).18, Name the various elements of ISO: 9000 series standards = .
ns : The various elements (Clauses ) of quality system as per ISO : 9000 series standards
pest anaune §
‘Management Responsi
Quality systems
Cofract Review.
Design Comtrol
Document Control
Purchasing
Purchaser supplied Product.
Product Tdentfication and traseability
Process contrdl
10, Inspectiemend testing .
1. Inspection Measuring anid Test Equipment.
12, Inspection and Test status. . .
13. Contret of No-confermning Products
14, Comective Action,
15. Handling, storage, Packaging and Defivery.
16. Quality Records
17, Internal Quality Audit
18. Training.
19. Servicing
20, Statistical Techniques.
30 : 9000 standards, thus cover all aspects of functioning of any organisation, It involves
:velopment of the Total organisation, The implementation of Quality management system
[Link] TSO : 9000/15 : 14000 series standards is effected through a well documented
uality manual along with procedures, instructions and formats for records.
19, Describe in brief the pre-requisites for implementing ISO : 9000 Quality system.
as : For implementing 180 : 9000 Quality systems, effectively, the organisation mist meet
3 following requirements:
Development of quality Awareness.
Imparting Education and Training to Employees.
Introduction of Motivation and Incentive programme.
Development of measuring Euipments Laboratory. .
Development of planning scheme for Implementation. :
Management commitment to fully support the quality system with a strong will and
faith to make it success.
velopment of quality awareness : Everybody in the organisation from top to bottom
Std cartmed Phe vaitlfnd een nre dete prsalten mer era eo oid erists, - cables, o.. feect a athe te
Dea weMPCQLIA Si
pts = | Metrology & Quality Contrat
is necessary to convince every employee is accept quality as as part of work and get their
wilful support in implementing and maintining of quality policy of the orgénisation as their
main fesponsibility.
Imparting Education and Training to Employees : Education and training to the workforce!
at. different levels is a must in order to make sure that the desired skill is available within ths!
rgagisation to meet international quality standards. The education and training programme}
should be structured for three levels on the lines of ISO 9004, a. Training for executives,
ining for technical personnel, . Training to. work force (shop floor) and production,
sors, Education and training must be job oriented and must be integral part of quality’
e programme : Quality systems have clearly recognised the
tance of people in achieving product qualit consistently. It should be noted that the principle
forck for meeting the specifications maintaining or improving quality lies not in the gauges,
instruments or other facilities for inspections; it lies in the state of mind of the persoris working
in te organisation from the top executive down tothe workers.
Loboratory for measuring Equipments : To measure and control the quality charactristics
of products test and measuring equipments are extremely important components of quality
system. Therefore, a metrology and material testing laboratory is very important pre-requisite
to make the quality system a success.
Planning scheme for Implementation : Quality planning (ISO : 9003 AND 9004) is a
written document which must be read and understood by everybody from top to botiom in the
organisation before implementing quality system. For projects relating to new products, services
or processes management should prepare, appropriate, written quality plans consistent with
all other requirements of a company’s quality management system.
.20. Deseribe in brief the installation Registration procedure of 1S0 : 9000 Quality
system.
Ans : ISO : standards are-adopted by Nationa! Standards Bodies of the individual countries,
‘These bodies if mutually recognised by the countries, are the certifying or registering bodies, In
our country Bureay of Indian Standards (BIS), is the National certification Body, The B/S has
introduced the Quality system certification Scheme according to IS : 14000 series of standards
‘These standards are identical to the intemationally accepted ISO :9000 series of standards of
quality system.
‘The quality system certification scheme of BIS entails implementation in day to day operating
of the organisation in conformity with the provision of IS0-9000 series standards. The quality
system certification of BIS has been accredited by the Road Voor de certificate (RVC) of the
- Netherlands. It has also entered into mutual agreement with DQS, Germany a leading iSO.
{9000 certification agency for recognition of each others certification.
‘The basic steps to be followed for ISO - 9000 certification are as given below.Quality Organised OE
Management Commitment
Prepare the workmen for change
Selection of appropriate model
Study the selected model
‘Set up steering Group and Sub-groups
Arrange Training of leaders and Co-ordinators
Prepare a check list
Prepare corporate Quality manual,
Prepare procedure manuals, operation manuals, work instructions ete.
10. ‘Up date all drawings and specifications,
11, Prepare schedule of training programme and educate employees.
12, Provide Tooling, equipments, Facilities., etc. to meet standards,
15. Carry out Internal Audit,
14. Take corrective Action.
15. Apply for Trial /Extemel Audit.
16, Implement Recommendation
17: Apply for Registration / Accreditation
18: Grant of Lincence: .
Once The tral auditresuts positive, the organisation isin a position to apply for regitration
BIS/or any other intemationally recognised Body.
‘After the application has been accepted, the documented quality system will be examined
certifying agency to veritfy the conformance to the relevant standard, Descrepencies if
§, will have to be corrected by the applicant,
‘The corrective action taken by the firm on the discrepancies observed during assessment
MWhave to be verified by the certifing agency, Based on the findings of the assessment team
A satisfaitory report, licence will be granted to the firm by BIS/ISO: to use the certification
kin letter heads, quality certificates etc.
SRA a RN
21, Name the standard bodies in India which provides guidance in connection with
1SO:9000, ~
8 # In India the following standard bodies provides guidance to Indian industries :
1, Bureau of Indian Standards : The Bureau of Indian standrds (BIS) is the National
‘tification Body. It gives guidance for launching quality system cerfication in the following
(Quality system appreciation programme.
Quality system survey
‘Trial Assessment
Licensing
epee|. The BIS has introduced the quality system certification scheme according to18 14
series of standards are identical to the internationally accepted ISO : 9000 series of
standard of quality system.
Confederation of Indian Industry (CT)
Breawof Veritas Quality Intemational Ltd., Bombay
National Centre for Quality management
Quality management International
National Productivity council (NPC) ete. also provides guidance in some areas
related 10 ISO : 9000.
0.22. What is machine eapability ® State its importance. Name the methods used fo
dctermining machine capability.
‘Ans : Machine tool selected shouldbe able to: give required machining accuracy and
surface finish consistently. Hence, machine capability is the ability to produce the parts
products, components within the specified tolerance limits consistenily.
Bit, the mactiine toot do not remain in the same Condition due to wear, improper use, pool
maintenance etc. Preventive maintenance, prope. lubrication, use of coolent, trained worker
‘good quality materials, tools etc. may help to maintain the machine capability for = Yonge!
Period. .
Machine capabilities change with time, and because the change take place in a relative
short time period, this possibility should be constantly considered by the engineer. Thus repeate
runs of products manufactured do not give exactly the same results. The width of the band of
‘each inherent variation is the important factor taht determines the capability of the machine tq
produce non defective products.
Capability of a new maching too! is Known from the catalogués. But machine tools goes o
foosing accitracy due 10 wear ete. Hence the machine capability determined at one time
not be an indication later on of he inherent ability to mest the tolerance.
Before: Seledting dria buying tachi, itis Hace deary 10 kHOW whether the machine he i
specifyig is adequate to meet the designed tolerance (assuming normal operation and
maintenance ofthe process) several methods ae in use for determining machine capabiliy.
“Try out thé product as made by the machine in actual
Measurement (ie. testing) of the machine itself as in case of machine tools.
‘Measurment of the product (tumed out by the machine) against the product tolerances|
Measurement of the process capability of the machine in terms of 6c limits ag
explained in Chapter 6.
ovens
Ree‘Qual
Q.23 Describe in brief.
1) National codes
2) International codes
Ans, 1) National. Codes : Most of the countries have their own Standards Bodies who
forinulate specifications for a variety of products. In India Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS)
is the National Standards Body. Various technical committees work within the framework of
BIS on produets of not only consumer use, but also on products for consumption by various
industries. Members of the committees:are drawn from manufacturers, users, research
‘organisations, Govt. departments or any other interested individual experts or organisations.
“The different jobs performed by BIS are as under:
’) Providing standards in documented form for products, materials and the processes.
i) Toissue the ISI certification for industrial produdis under ISI Certification marks scheme
under Act, 1952.
i?) Circulation of latest information through their journals regarding standardization.
iv) Providing intemstional standards in India, in collaboration with ISO (Intemational
Organisationfor Standardisation) and IEC (International Electrochemical Commission) in
Europe.
2) International Codes : The development of own national standards by major industrial
countries for similar type of products bear litle resemblance to one another. Thus standards
(national) have become hinderance to easy flow of goods from country to country.
180 :9000 series of standards on quality system was formulated by International Organisation
for Standardisation in order to meet the requirements of internationally uniform quality system,
European countries adopted these standards in their own National Stendards, The European
‘Nation Trade has reached an understanding that the post 1992 trade transaction would. be
dealt only with those companies who have registered ISO : 9000 quality systemn. India, too,
adopted these standards through IS 10201 in parts in 1988 and later year which were
subsequently as IS : 14000 series.
CSC CHAKRAVARTHI
‘Assistant Manager - QA/(QCChapter... 14
STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL
(S.Q.C,)
Q.1. Define the term Statistical Quality Controt (S.Q.C.) and state its benefits.
Ans : A quality control system is called 8.Q.C. when statistical techniques are employed to
control quality of fo solve quality control problems, Statistics based on law of large numbers.
and the mathematical theory of probability. It is in this sense that the adjective statistical is
accurately used in the expression statistical quality control.
In S.Q.C, the mathematical statistical approach neutralizes personal bias and uncovers
poor judgement. Modern techniques of statistical quality control and acceptance sampling
‘ave an important part to play in the improvement of quality, enhancement of productivity,
creation of consumer confidence and development of the industrial economy of the country.
Benefits of Statistical Quatity Control :
1. Efficiency and cost reduction : Since only a fraction of out put is inspected, use of
S.Q.C. ensures rapid and efficient inspection at minimum cost,
2. Reduction of Scrap : It enables to forecast the troubles before rejections occur and
reduces the amount of spoiled work.
3, More effective pressure : On quality improvment than 100% inspection.
4, Eady doteGhbh SttnGny DNC phe help of control charts deterioration in quality can
be casifAetectedannd parcastive action can be taken,
5. Adherence to specification : So long a statistical control continues specification can
be accurately predicted for future, by which itis possible to assess the capability of the
process to meet the specifications,
6. Easy application
7, Reduction in scrap, rework and consumer complaints,
& Better customer relations,
‘9. Creates quality awareness in employees,
10, Improves productivity and reduces wasted machine and man hours.i Quality Control (S.C)
2.2. Define central tendency and explain the meaning of mode, median and
Arithmetic mean as measures ‘of central tendency,
ins : Central Tendency : When accurately measured the dimensions of most of the
components tend to concentrate close to the middle of the two extremes, This is called “Central
rendency’ In other words the maximum number of components will have sizes equal to or
ipproximately close to the midle size, and the sizes bigger or smaller than the middle size wil
ve less frequent and lie near the two extremes.
Pentral tendency is usually expressed in three ways :
| 1, The average value (Arithmetic mean)
| 2, The middle value (median)
3, The most frequently occuring value (mode)
Mode :
| Mode is the value that occurs most [Link] a frequency histogram or frequency
polygon,itis the observed value corresponding to the high point of the graph. In fact mode is
‘most unstable average and its true value is difficult to determine. For example, the recorded
sbservations are;
-2,3,2,4,5,2,6,7,2,4,2
“Here 2 occurs most frequently hence mode = 2. .
Median :
‘When all the observations are arranged in ascending or descending order, then median is
he magnitude of the middle case. It has half the observations above it and half below.
Téthere are “n’ observations of the variate and they are arranged in ascending order:
at a
‘The median is given by [——] value if “Nis odd.
On the other hand the oes is the average of & xy and ( Nay y value if “Nis
ven. - 2 2
Arithmetic Mean :
‘The arithmetic mean X is the average of all the values of variate in the sample.
UX, Xp Xp Xp anew X, are then values ofthe variate X in the sample, thei A.M. is given
2
eM th Ky ta +Xy
0 2
IEX, occurs f, times, X, occurs f, times ete, and lastly X, occurs f, times, there being n
servations,
5 Xih +X 4% +
+ Xfm
autogether then, X ht+ht on‘The [Link] used to denote average size, average yield average percent defective etc.
“Q.3. Define dispersion. Explain the various measures of dispersion,
Ans : Dispersion : The exent to which the datais scattered about the zone of central tendency
is known as dispersion.
‘The various meacures of dispersion are :
2, Range (R)
2, Standard deviation
3. Variance.
Range +
Range is [Link] betwoen the largest observed value and the smallest observed value
ina sample. ‘
ie. R= Largest value - Samllest value
Range is the simplest measure of dispersion in a sample. 11 is particularly used in the
control chart.
Standard Deviation: .
Standard deviation (¢ ) is the [Link]: Standred deviation is defined as the root mean
square of the differences between the obsérvations and the mean.
IfX,, XpX,.....X, are “n’ number of observations. *F = Arithmatic mean
Thene = (Xi -X)' + (a -XP + + (XX)
Yuk Where, i varies 110
Variance:
Variance is the sum of the squares of the deviations from the arithmetic mean divided by
the number of observations “n,’
In other words variance (o *)is the square of the standard deviation.
Q.4, Differentiate between attribute inspection and variable inspection.
OR
Differentiate between quality by variables and quality by attributes.
Ans:
‘Variable Inspection Attribute Inspection
Variable inspection consists of Attribute inspection consists ofjudging
measuring the quality characterstics conformance or non conformance of the
to be inspected with the help of quality characteristics with the laid down.
precision measuring instruments. standard.Statistical Quality Contrel (S. mm
Variable Inspection
Attribute Inspection
2, Actual dimensions say diameters of
number of spindles are measured
with the help of micro meter, vernier
r etc, and the data is recorded.
43, Itprovides detaited information about
the quality characteristic.
4, The time required and the cost of
inspection is quite large
5. Itmay cause fatigue to the
inspectors. Therefore the
meausrements may go wrong,
6 The data obtained from variable *
inspection is called as continuous
data, and can have any value over
certain interval
7. Example: A dimension of parts
measured, Hardness in Roackwell
units, Temp,, tensile strength, weight
ete.
2. The conformance or non conformance is
usually inspected with th help of Go-No-
Go gaves. And items are classified as
defectives or non defective.
3, Itjust gives information about whether
the parts are acceptable or not,
4, itrequires minimum time and cost,
5. It does not cause fatigue to the inspectors,
Therefore this method is suitable inmass
production, where largenumber of similar
parts are to be inspected.
6. The data obtained is called discrete data,
“The discrete data con have certain integer
value. For example, asample of 25 casting
taken from a lot may contain 6, 1, of 2
defectives there can not be fracation
defectives such es 234 defectives,
7. Example : Number of defective pieces
found inasample, surfs finish of .
furniture, cracks iri sheets by spot welding
etc.
Q.5. Define frequency distribution. Draw neatly the normal distribution curve and
mention its characteris
. State the uses of this curve in quality control.
Ans : Frequency distribution : When the measured sizes of all the products are plotted
against the frequency of occurances of each size in the form of graph, itis known as frequency
distribution, The height of the curve at any point is proportional to the frequericy of occurance
of that particular size .
Normal Distribution Curve : fn the freqaeney distribution if he number of observations
are increased the frequency polygon assumes ¢ bell shape and ayiproximates to normal
distribution curve, ifoniy the chance causes of varation are present in the quality characteristics
measuied.
Characteristi
1, The normal distribution curve is bell shaped and symmetrical about its mean. The curve
is fully defined by X and ¢
2. Theoretically, heN.D. curve extends from - ao (minus infinity) to + <© (plus infinity).Metrology & Quality Controt
However forall practical purposes we can consider normal
curveas extending only3. values othe left and 3.¢ valuesto
the right of the mean (X +3).
3. The most commonly quoted limits in connection with the
curve ere as follows.
Fig.14.1 Normal Curve
‘Specification limits Percent of total Area.
Within specified limits.
68.26
a
+
420
+30
Uses of N.D. eurve in qi
1. When meausred sizes of parts are plotted against frequency of their occurance and if
the frequericy distribution curve approximates to N.D. curve it means that practically
no assignable causes of variation are present.
. Itis useful in process capability study to find out whether the process is capable of
meeting the specified tolerances or not.
‘The area under the curve between tw6 limits represents the total percent of production
‘that will fall within these limits.
Itis useful to calculate the expected proportion or observations that will be less than or:
equal to specified value X.
. Ttalso helps to calculate the expected proportion of observations that will be beyond a
specified value X.
. When we select 3 ¢ limits, we are'99.73% suire that the observations will lie within:
these limits.
Q.6.. What is the interpretation of three standard deviation?
‘Ans t Theoretically the normal distribution curve extends from. 42 to - co. However, fo
all practical purposes we can consider normal curve as extending only 3.¢_ values to the le
and 3. values to the right of the mean,
‘When we select 3 limits, we are 99.73% sure that the observations will lie within thes
limits.Q.7. Name and describe the various ways of graphical representation of frequency
distribution,
Ans : The frequancy distribution can be represented graphically by the following ways :-
Frequency Histogram.
‘Frequency polygon.
Bar chart,
Ogive curve
a. Less than ogive curve,
b. More than ogive curve.
1. Frequency Histogram : Fig.14.2 shown a frequency histogram. In this graph the
sides of the column represents the upper and lower cell boundries and hights are proportional
to the frequencies of occurances within the cells. It drawing a histogram itis assumed that
the frequency is centred at the mid value of the class or cell.
‘The'simplicity of construction and interpretation of the
histogram makes it an effective tool in the elimentry analysis
ofthe data. A random sampleis solected from the lot under
consideration and measurements are made for selected quality,
characteristic. When there is# large amount of highly variable
date then it may be grouped in to cells, the class limits and
coll boundries are decided and the frequency histogram is,
ptt plotted. As a general rule,at least 50 measurements should
Wign4.2 be taken to provide sufficient data to reveal the basic
Frequency Histogram pattern of variation within the lot .
2. Frequency Polygon : It consists of a series of straight lines joining points which are
plotted at cell mid points with a height proportional to the frequency. The advantage of frequency
polygon is that frequency polygons of several distributions may be plotted on the same
axis,thereby making certain comparison possible. Fig.14.3 shown frequency polygon.
eee
| . ¥
i ‘
* r
Fig. 14.3 Frequeny polygon Fig. 14.4 Bar chart
3. Bar chart : A frequency bar is # graphical representation of the frequency distribution
in which the bars are centered at the mid point of the cells, The heights of the bars aregreater than the respective cell boundries. Less than ogive curva
is agraph between upper class boundary and the less than curmulativ
frequency. It is an “s’ shaped curve which gives a cumulativ
frequency ofa variable less than a given value of the variable.
Tn more than ogive curve the cumulative frequency is plotted
' dhgonmr—iea
i SHS Sean” against the lower class boundry. Itis an inverted “s" curve whic!
Fig. 145 Ogive curve: gives a cumulative frequency of the variable more then a gives
Value ofthe variable,
Q.8. Differentiate between Discrete Data and continuos Data.
b. Classify the following data as to whethere they are discrete or continuos.
Weekly number of accidents in agiven plant,
Tensile strength of cotton yarn in Kg/em2
‘Monthly number of machines rejected.
Daily employment.
Diameters of metal cylinder.
6 Cracks in sheet by spot welding,
Discrete Data : In analyzinig variability itis essential to distinguish two types of data
1, Discrete data.
2. Continuous data,
‘The data that arise from counting is discrete, The discrete data is oblairied by attributel
‘inspection, The discrete data can take certain integr value. For examples a sample of 254
casting taken from a lot may contain o,1,or2 defectives there can not be fraction defective}
such as'24 defectives.
Coritinuous Data : Continuous data refers to data that can potentially take on any value
within a given range. ‘This means that within that range there is no inherent resttiction on the
values that may be taken. Continuous ¢stais obtained by variable inspection,
b. 1, Weetly number of accidents in a given plant-Disexect.
Tensile strength of cotton yam in kg/em?-continuos
Monthly number of machines rejected-Discrete.
Daily Employment - Discrete
Diameter of meta! cylinder continuous
Cracks on sheet by spot welding-Diserete.
Ans
Q.9. Define the terms,
+ Grouped frequecy distribution.
2. Universe or population:
Ans: 1. Grouped frequecy distribution : Grouped frequency distuibtion of a [Link]
obsetvation is an arrangément which shows the frequency of occurances of the values of theical Quality Control (S.C)
variables in ordered classes. The interval along the scale of measurement of each ofdered
class is termed as acell. The frequency for any cell is the number of observations in that cell.
2. Universe or populstion : The universe can be thought of as 2 common source from
which the total collection of units is obtained, The terms universe, population and parent
distribution has the same meaning. Ststistical methods are based on the concept of a distribution
of ori exceedingly large number of observations, termed as an infinite universe or population.
“PROBLEMS & SOLUTION.
|. , Five thermostatic controls are tested to determine the “on” temperature. The
measured values’ are 344°, 338°, 342°, 335%, and 336°,. These, values contitue
* the first sub group for certain control chart.
“Calculate the arithmetic meni, range; standard devication and variance of this
subgroup.
Solution : Avithatic meas X = 244 4338+ 32 +335 +336
= ies 3.339%
Arranging in ascending order the values are
335°, 336°, 342° and 344°
Median = Central value = 338°
Range = Largest value - smallest value
344 -335=9°
Standard deviation: | (Xs~ X)*
a
39)? + (336 - 339)? + G38
139)? (342-339)? + (244 ~ 339)?
3
a [IBF 9 F149 425” [60 wil = 346410
7 3 ao
variance = 0? = 12re 7 Metrology & Quality Control
14.2 For the following data calculate the Arithmetic mean and standard deviation?
Celi mid points Celiboundries [Frequency
35 CS 3825 8
390 3875 10
395 392.5 6
400 397.5 W.
405 ‘402.5 8
407.5
Solution :- For: convenience the data may be tabulated as followes : .
Satgadie [ested [ [ron
3825-3875
3875-3925
3925-3975
3975-4025
4025-407.
Total
Efe 22045 °
n | 58
2
B
[2079375 sos60)2
38 ~
= ¥I56540 - 156499536
= V4058 = 637
Second method (shift of origin method) :
Standard deviation can be calculated easily by short cut calculations as under.
According to this method,
X=x+ 28
1) Arithemetic mean X =
= 395.60
2) Standard deviation
‘Where K is assumed origin, preferably the central value of X series:Quality Control (S:
d=X-K
mac = (2H. GRP
In this problem let K=375
‘The data can be tabulated as follows for convenience.
Arithemetic mean X =
35.
395 + = 395.6
see |
~ [2s a5?
38 3B
. = 38.864 = 6.2340
14.3. One hundred steel pins with the specification of 10+0,015 10.70-0.010 diameter
were obtained and the data was recorded follows :
Diainmm| ‘[Link] pins
10.60-10.65 10.75 -10.80
10:65-10.70 10,80-10.85
10.70-10.75 10.85-10,90°
Find the Arithmetic mean and standard deviation. : “
2. Interpreat the results on the basis of Normal distribution and suggest the changes if
any. '
Solution : The data can be tabulated as follows for covenience.10,625
10.675
10.725
10.775
10,825
10.875
d=x-K (K= 10.775)
68 -150 0.750, 0.1125,
10 -0.100 -1.00 0.100
0 -0.050 as 0.075
5 0.0000 0.000 0.000
v7 +0050 “085 0.0425
3 40.100 030. | -0.030_
n=100 Efd=-2,100 ‘Ded2 = 0.3600
‘Atithmetic mean X ="K + EE = 10.795 + 22100.
{
fae |
Figas
ency Distribution Therefore the process is not within specification limits.
Following are the readings of 30 bars in 2 sample with specification S0ram'
50.1
503
190-
10.774:- 0.021
=-10.734
fa? (fa? 360 (2.1)?
ova a Too“ tog” = 58
30 limité on normal curve
= 3x 0.056 = 0.168
2 SX£30 = 10.7544 0.168
‘Therefore maximurn dimension that can be produced by’
this process
10.754 ¥ 0, 586mm,
The specifacation limits are 10.70 + 0,015 = 10.715
and 10.70- 0,010= 10.640
498 500 499 - S00 $03 501 °501 * 50.2
ow eee znd fag” aoe enn eA ehSalistical Quality Control (SOC) wero
1, Frequency Distribution Table
| Tabulation Frequency.
498 i 2
49.9 tit It g
$0.00 : tHE 10
50.1 ah a 15
50.2 Hie th 8
50,3 th 4
504 la -
505 tt 3
2. Frequency polygram and distribution curve +
Sfx
a
= 492 x 24499 x B50 x 10450.1 x 154503 x 44505 x3
iii) Arithmetic mean X =
= $0,092
for calculating stadard deviation the data may be tabulated as follows.
Fig.3.6 frequency polygaon
Diameter minx] Frequency — (Xj-X) (Q%j-x)2 £(Xi- KP
% 4
49.8 2 (0.292, , 0.08526 0.1705,
499 8 192 0.03696 0.2949
50.0 10 .092 0.00846 0.0846
50.1 5 40,108 0.00061. 0.0096
50.2 . 8 +0.208 0.0166 0.0933,
50.3 4 40,208 8.0416 0.1664
50.4 Foes - - -
505 3 40.408 0.18646 9.4994
Lei(xi- XP - 13187Metrology & Quality Control
Zid=0.4
n=50
DAMX=K+ eu
cs
=°50.092 mm
132-_-¢0.4)2
30 30
= 00264 - 0.000064
= 0.16228
= 501+
14.8, You have collected the following data from micrometer measurements in mil
2meters of a sample selected form a large lot of machined parts and have formel
frequency tally sheet of the data as follows:Measurements Tally Measurements Tally
25.70 1 25.10 I
25.60 dl 25.00 tH
25.50 aH 2490 aH
25.40 . tt 24.80 |
25.30 aH aH 2480 |
25,20 ua
i Compute the average and standaid deviation es (ea)
" aMetrology & Quality Comol Sia
240 - (1.80)?
30 50
= 0.048 - 0.012967
= V0006704 = 0.216
now3a = 0.648
‘Maximum dimension that can be produced by the process,
X = ,25,236+3x0.216= K +30
= 25.884mm
Minmum dimension that can be produced = X - 30
= 25,236-3x.216
= 24.588mm
Fig. 14,7 Normat
Distribution. - :
But the upper and lower specification limits are 25.50 and 24.50mm. Theréfore, the process
is not within specification limits,
The process is not capable of mecting the tolerance the suggested remedy is to reduce the
dispersion or increase that tolerances and maintain the centering of the process.
14.6. The mean and standard deviation of a sample of 100 observations was calulated
as 40 and 5.1 respectively, While comparing with the original data it was found
that by mistake a figure of 40 was miscopied-as 50 for one observation,
Calcittate the correct mean and standard deviation,
Solution :- Now Re ea
N
” Ex = 40
Ex = 4,090
Corrected EX will be = 4,000 - 50 + 40
= 3,990
x = 3990
and Comect X= =Keni Quality Control (S.Q.C) aa
Gay = BE. 100
(1600 + 26.0.1) «100 = Ex? = 162601
« Comected ZX? = (50) + (40)?
16170 2
Comera = fT - 39.90)
ps = 5
1. A machine shop producess steel pins. The weight of 100 pins were checked
after machining and data was recored as follows.
9:50-9.51
9,529.53 8
9.54 -9.85 6
9.56 «9.57 a
2. Find the arithmetic mean and standard deviation,
p. Plot the frequency histogram,
c. Plot the ogive curves.
i, Less than ogive curve,
ii, More than ogive curve.
The data may be tabulated as follows for convenience
Widthinmm — allmidpoints frequency d=x-k ff
9.50-9.51 9505 6 060-036 ~—(0.0216
9.52-9.53 9525 2 0.040 0.08 0.0032,
9.54-9.55 9545 2 0.020 -040—0,0080
9.56 -9.57 9.565 32 0.000 0.00 0.0000
9.58-9.59 9.585 R +0.020 0.44 0.0088
9.60-9.61 9.605 8 40.040 032 0.0128
9.62 -9.63 9.625 6 40,060 036 0.0216
9.64 +9.65, 9.645 4 +0080 032 0.0256
Lid = 0.60 Era? = 0.1016Metrology & Quality Control
K=K+ BG ~ 9565+ 28 <5
7 100
a fy
¢
a fO-1918. (ay
1d ~ (100)
= fER (2)
[Link]
with less >; with'more than
i ~ classupper _fower class
. classboundry |” “ boundery
9.50-9.51 ».9.495-9.515 "...9:505 100
9.$2-9,53.....9.$15-9.535... 9545.
954-955 9535-9555 9.543,
9,56-9.57 9555-9575 9.565
9,58 -9.59
9.60-9,61 9,595-9.651 9.605
962-936 9,615-9.635, 9.625.
964-965 9.635-9.655
BaeN BBR
Fig 14.10 Less than ogive curvejeal Quality Control (
Q.10. Define “Contro! chart” state the objectives of control charts for var
Rand o Charts). - -
Ans. :Defination : A control chart is # graphical representation of the collected information,
‘The inforhaton:may pensinto a measured quality characteristic (eng, ameter, thickness
ete.) or'a judged quality characteristis
In other words contro? chart i a devices,
- Which specifices state of statistical control. .
=~ adevice for attaining statistical Control:
= adevice'td jiidge whether'a state of statistical control has attained. °
Objectives of X,R and o Charts
“LX and'R Of X ‘and @ Charts aré ied it combination for the control piocess,
X chart shows the cenitring of the process i.e, it shows the variation in the average of
ables (X,
the samples. Yoeet
R chart shows the uniformity or Consistency of the process i.e. it shows variaifons in
the ranges of the samples,
@ chart shows the variation of [Link].
2 Thecontrol charts are usod to determine whether a given process can meet the existing
specificerions without a fundamental change in production process,
3. To secure information to be used in-establishing or changing production procedures,
4, To secure information when it is necessary to widen the tolerances.
5, To secure information to be used in establishing or changing inspection procedure or
acceptance procedure or both.
6. To provide a basis for current decisions on. seepimesrrsoeion of manutd or
purchased parts, 1 ne
To ensure product quality level.
Control charts builds up the reputation of the organization: dough ‘customers satisfaction,
To determine when to hunt for causes of variation and take action to correct them and
when to leave the process alone. sultans
a 11. What do you ‘understand DY. “statistical control ofprod process”?
Ans : From a batch of prodeuts manuftictiired by a certain productiofi process, Some of the
products are selected at random. Vheir quality characteristics say (lengthidiamete, thickness
tc) are measured and classified according to'actual dimensions, ~
Uwe tabulate theso dimension® tivorder of size (in dsonding or desohidig order) and give
the frequencies with which each sizé octurs, we havea frequency distribution,
Ifthe distribution of observation follows anormal curve, then itis assumed thatthe variations
‘ure due to chance causes and no assignable causes of error are present. The condition which
produced these variations are said to be under control and itis concluded that the process is
under satistical control, On the other hand ifthe distribution doss not follow anormal curve
enMetrology & Quality Control
‘then itis concludeid that one or more assignable causes of error are presentand the process is:
not in statistical control. ]
Q.12, Describe the method of contructing X and R charts and explain how these}
charts helps in determining lack of control.
‘Ans : The various steps in contructing % and R charts are as follows:
1, Caleulate the average X and range R for each subgroup
A good number of samples of items manufactured are collected at random at differentf
intervals of time and their quality characterstics (diameter,thickness, weight etc) are
measured, .
For each sample; average value and range is calculated for example, ifa sample contains
five items whose dimension are X,, X, Xj Xp Xp nese. then
"The sample Average x = X1+ Xa+ Xs Xq + X;
. 3 .
Range = Largest value - smallest value.
2. Calculate the grand average X and average range K.
‘The grand average ¥ is the average of averages.
Itis obtained by dividing the sum of 3% values by the number of samples (subgroups)
ke X= ER where N= Number of samples.
Similarly R = 2
Calculation ‘of 3 sigma limits on control chart for %":
‘The control limits are given by the relation
Upper control limit X = X + 30K
Lower control limit X = X - 30%
‘Where GX Standard deviation of the averages = 4
‘Where n= sample size
Standard deriation of the universe and
= Rfdy whore d, is factor which depends on 9 sample size.
To shorten the calculations following formules may be used.
UCL = K+ AR -----+-42) 07,or
LCLX = X - Ayo"
LCLX = X" + Aer
LCLK = X" + Act
4. Calculate 3 sigma control limits for R chart for R chart:
UCLR = D4 Ror D0”
UCLR = D;Ror Das"
‘The values of the various factors A, A,, Ay D,, D,,D,,D, are based on normal distribution
nd can be found from standard tables fora particular sample size,
5. Plot the 5 and R Chart : While plotting % chart the central fine on the % hart
pould be drawn as a solid horizontal line at 5¢. ‘The upper and lower controt limits for
nart should be drawn as dotted horizontal lines at the computed values,
Similarly, for R Chart the central line will indicate Rand the control limits are shown by
vted horizontal lines. :
‘Then plot the averages of the sub-groups in X chart in the order collected and the ranges
R chart. The R chart is plotted below the’ chart. Points outside the control limits are
licated with cross ont chart and by circle on R chart,
6. Drawing preliminary conclusions from control charts : Lack of control is
icated by points falling outside the control limits on either 3X or R chart. When all the
ats fall inside the control limits if means thal the process is in control. Itreally means for all
xtical purposes it acts as if no assignable causes of variation are present. However, | out
$ points or 2 out of 100 points can be tolerated and the process is said to be in control.
ilarly arun of seven consecutive points on the side of central line indicates lack of control.
4, What is Variability?
Differentiate between ‘Chance causes' and ‘Assignable causes’ of variation
giving suitable examplés.
Variability : In nature two extremely similar things are difficult to obtain, This facts
good for production process also. No production processes can produce all items of
cts exactly alike, The production process consists of combination of men, materials and
ne. Each of these elements has some inherent or natural variation as well as some un-
| variations due to assignable causes,
example, suppose drilling operationis to be performed on castings. The first source of
ons tha materia! itsel! (some castings may be harder than the otheres, some of them
ve internal defects) ifthe operations are done on # mass production by number of
9n different machines, he second source of variation is the machines. Ths coriditions
sines may differ. The third source of variation, mans the most variable of them alt
lay ba didferneces in skill. experience of the workers doina sha---
A)emma of
xz—ee Metrology & Quality Contre’
The same person may actin different ways in different psychological conditions, and adds
to variability in the quatity characterstics of the product.
There are two kinds of variations in a production processes that causes vari
quality charactersties of the product. These are:
1. Variations due to chance causes.
2. Natiations due to assignable causes.
inthe
Variations [Link] chance causes
(Random variation)
1, These are due to the in
natutal variability in t .
production (Men materials and
machines) :
2, These variations are difficult to trace,
‘They are due to some inherent charac
teristic of the process or machine.
3. The chance factors effect each
[Link] separate manner
‘Variations due to assignable causes
“ | 3 Those variations posses ss giater .
| Goniditions, mistake on the part ofthe .
dimensions of machined parts,” 1d
operator, Jack of qua iy
Q.14, What is meant by process eapability? How will you determine the'siime:Howg
process capability study ‘helps in’ ‘tehiieviig desired quality?
¢ Process capability may be defined as the minimum spread ofa specitic nfeasuremen|
variation, 11 includes 99.7% 6f the imeasuirineis from the given process!" Matheniaticallyd
process capability =64' since g' is taken 'S ameasure of he spread of te process. [is als
called as natural tolerence.
While detetmining process capability, it is necessary to minimize the effet of factors sul
as un-natural material variation, process adjustment ele. and trainéd opérators should be allowed
to perform the work. A number of simples ate taken over a period of time: ‘The proces
capability is dorie in the following manner.
1. Caloulite the average X and range R of euch sample.
2. Caloulate the grand average X and daverage rarige R. This measures the’ eonting of
thie: process,Fate Quang Consi(S OC) SCSCSCs~S*~«i
1 ‘Calculate the process. capabitity 60°.= .6( R/a,) where d, is a factor for a particular
sample size,
process capability stady helps for achieving the desired quality inthe following memes.
L. Ithelps to find out whether the process is capable of meeting the specified limits or not.
2> Todiscover why a process capable is failing to meet the specifications,
‘When a controlled process must meet two specification limits, upper specifiaction limit
Lower specification limit the possible relationship between. process capability and the
:cification limits may be grouped in three classes-as described below:
1... (Xmax-Xmin) > 6.0":1e, specified tolerance is greater than natural tolerance:
‘Where Xmax= Upper specifations limit...
Xmin Lower specifation limit..."
‘The frequency curves a,b,c and d shows various positions
in which the process may be centred:
Conclusion +i. With any positions, practically all the
products manufactured will meet specifetions as long
‘as the process stays in control,
quency of control chart
It the ratio is considerably targe:
may be reduced. 2 ;
2. (xmax-min) <6 Canclusion : In this
ise defective parts K
the remedy will be,
“1 Ticrease the tolerance.”
Rédkige dispersion, ying faire
chanlés in the production methods; machines
_used ote.
- ee Suffer and sort out tho defectives, ifitis eco
Fig.14.10 . * "pontiicat than making the fundamental changes.
iv, Itis still importantt maintain centring of the process.
3. (XK max-X min) be" +
Conclusion + 3 “
“i Wis necessary to maintain centring of the process.
ii, Ifis advisable to increase tolerence if they are
tighter than is really necessary.
ii, Reduce dispersion if it is economical.‘Metrology & Quality Control
QS, State the importance of process (machine) eapability study in solving quality
problems.
‘Ans : Theinformation obtained from process capability is of greet importance in solving quality
problems'as follows :
1. The design engine knowing the capability ofthe process andthe available equipment,
hias more rational basis while selecting the specifications,
2. The planning enginner, can assign the jobs with more tight tolerances to the most
capable machines and that with wider tolerance'to the less precise machines.
3. The tool designer can-spot the places where tooling improvements must be made to
maintain the process capability.
4, ‘The capability information helps the foremen to decide which machine may require
overhaul.
5," The machine set up man learns which machine requires the most attention to set up
and which one needs only normal care:
6 ‘Themachine operator and inspector can decide which machines needs closest watch
‘in production.
7, -While purchasing it provides a means to compare actual performance of equipment
with the manufactures claims,
[Link] process capability mathematically. For a particular process standard
deviation is 0.5 with specified tolerances T, - T, = 2.
Ans: .
i” Whatis the process capability in this case?
ii, Ifprocess capability is less then T, - T, comment about the process.
Mathematically process capability can he defined as, process capability = 6g"
Where g? = standard deviation of the population from which samples are taken for
measurement of quality characterstic.
i When o’=0.5, process capability =65” = 6x0.5 =3 units.
and specified tolerence=2 units.
se ——d
Fig, 14.91
In this caso (T,-T,) <6." process capability is greater than
specified tolerence Therefore defective parts will always be
there.
Fig.14.12 | i, In this case (T, -T,) 60"‘Therefore the process is capable of meeting the specified
tolerences, capability 6g” is less than one -half of the tolererice,
|. _ consider reducing the tolerence secondly 100% inspections not
Fig. 14.13 necessary and'a sampling prodedure should be used.
Q.17. Study the figure given above and answer the following?
i. State the tendency of this process, Is the process under control ? Give reasons.
ii, What are the possible causes of variations.
Ans:
' 7—— thre «ior int. The consecutive points on the chart above tend to
x yl ow move from lower contro! limit to upper control limit.
oe There is a rising trend: Since the change is taking
kare ene tre place slowly and though all the points are lying within
d controf limits, after some time itis ikely that the pro
rae ‘cess may go out of control if proper care is not taken.
Fig, 14,14 2. It indicates that some assignable causes may be
present, such as change in tool'setting. Therefore the too! must be set exactly at the normal.
Inmay also be caused due to tool wear. .
Q.18. Study the given figure below and answer the following :
i. Name the figure. What information is obtained
from the above figure.?
fi, Whatis the trend of the readings indicated as(+)?
iii, Compare the trends of readings indicated by(x) .
and (0) with respect to (4)
iv, What is the important use of the information
obtained above? :
Ass. woe
1. The fig. shows Rchart. The averages of various samples are plotted on the X chart.
The various potrits (+) (0), (x) indicates various trends;
2. The reading (+) indicates rising trend. The consecutive points tend fo mave steadily
towards upper contro! limit and the process is going steadily Gut of gontrol as the last
paint goes above upper control limit
3. The points indicated by (x) shows chance pattern of variations, Most of the points are
near the centre live X no points are beyond the control limits. The process is in control.
‘The points indicated by (a) shows that there is an erratic change and the process may go
‘uf of controt. It means some assignable causes of variation are present.i
“Ans + Control chart for fraction defective (P chart): It is ealled as p’chart. Fract ion|
Meitology & Quality Control
The (+) points indicates rising trend. The process is going steadily out of control. Some
assignable causes of error may be present.
Q.19. Outline the theory underlying control charts for
i Fraction defective.
ii, Defects
defective may be defined as the ratio of the mumber of defective articles is any inspection to
the total number of articles actually inspected. Fraction defective is,always expressed
decimal fraction.
P-Chart may be applied to quality cheracteristi¢s, that can. be. vobserve d only
attributes,e.g. dimensions checked by Ga and No-Go gauges.
For P chart,
‘The central line, P =
Number off detective articlos :
Total number of articles inspected po
‘The control limits for P chart are. .
“Upper control init UCLP = B+. ro
7
Lower conta limit LOLP =F 7-3 oD Fa-)
7
Purpose of P chart : .
Because of the lower inspection and mai
‘greater area of economical applications than the control charts for variable,
A control chart for fraction defective may have any ofie of the following purpose.
1, Todiscover the average proporation of defetive articles submitted: for inspection, ove
period of time, oy .
Ina sampling inspection of large lots of purchased articles, :
‘To bring to attention of management, any changes in average quality level.
To discover, identify and correct causes Of bad quality.
It provides the management with useful record of quality history.
‘To suggest where it is necessary to use X and R chart to dignose que
Contfol Chart for defects :(C chart)...
C chast applies to the number of the defects in a subgroup. of constant size, w is aiso ar
attribute. chart.
‘The central line, C
Awan
‘Number of defects
‘Total number of subgroups
Uppes Control Limit; UCL = & + yy
Lower contro limit, LCLC = € - aEQuality Control }
f [Link]
‘chart. Fraction
ny inspection to
ys expressed gs
served only-as
‘inspection, over’
tevel. ”
ality problems.”
size, It [Link] an}
[[Bistinicat Quatigy Consol (S.O-C)
Applications : Control chart for defects “C’ chart and “U’ charthas much more restricted
field of usefulness as compared to X and R charts and P charts. The examples, of typical
applications of C chart are:
|. Number of surface defects in an aircraft wing.
Number of surface defects observed in a galvansied sheet or a painted or enameled
surfaces.
._ Number of small holes in glass bottles,
. Nurhber of imperfections observed in & cloth of unit area.
5. Number of foose soldered conriections.
Number of defects such as blow holes, eracks, undercuts etcin a casting or welded
piece.
_ Total number of defacs in complex assemblis such a radio recelving sets sowing
aching otc. C chart techniques helps to keep the number of defects to-minimum.
Q.20. Differentiate between defects and defectives. What do you mean by “U? Chart,
how does it differ from “C? Chart?
Ang : Difference between defects and defectives : An item is said to be defective if it
fails to conform to the specifiactions in any of the characteristics. Each characteristic that
oes not meet the specifications is a deféct. An item is defective if it contains at least one
defect. For example, ifa casting contains undesirable hard spats blow holes, cracks etc. the
casting is defective and the hard spots, blow holes, cracks etc, which makes the’ casting
defective'are ihe defects. °
“U Chart-s-C chart applies to number of defects in a subgroup of constant size however
when the subgroup size varies from sample to sample U chartis used. U chart is control chart
for number of defects per unit in a samaple of units.
. = Lc Numbor Of dofects in a sample
1 othr words , mor of min ape
‘The formual as for control on U chart aro,
ve <7 +3 f=
LbL=e- 3
m
and the contol line U = -= as explained above‘Ans ¢
1, Examples «+ XR Chart L
2. Type of data required variables 2
data (Measured values of quality
charac teristics)
3. Field of Application; control of. © 3.
individual quality characteristics
size or number of defect per unit.
4, Advantages sa, Provides maximum 4,
uflization of information available
from data,
'. Provides detailed information on
process average and variation for
contro! of individual dimension,
5. Disadvantages : a. They are not
easily understood untess training is
provided.
b. Can cause confusion between
control limits and specification limits.
c. Cannot be used with go-no-g6
type gauge inspections,
4 They involve more time for
measuring, calculation and plotting.
Ans:
Aavantegs +
Metrology & Quality Control
Q. 21. Differentiate between variable charts and Attribute charts?
‘Variable Charts Attribute Charts
Q.22, State the advantages and imitations of X and R charte (Vartabte charts).
PRP, ¢, uchatts,
Attribute data Gudged values of quality :
charateristics obtained by using Go NO Go
gauges.
Control of proportion of defectives o
number of defects in a subgroup of
constant
a, Data required are often already
‘available form inspection records,
b, Easily understood by all persons since it
ismore simple ns compareto “X ,Rand
Charts.
¢., Itprovides overall picture of quality
histroy.
4, They involve less cost and time.
a. They do not provide detailed
information for control ofindividual
characteristic, Hi
b, They do not recognize different degree
of dofectiveness (Weightage of defect).
1, _Ttenabtes to determine whether a process can meet the specificating or to collect fix
2.
3.
information for establishing or changing the specifications.
‘They suggest whether it is necessary to chenge the production procedure, proce:
machines ete.
11 also provides information for changing ths inspection techniques or acceptancd
procedures,
Ithelps to determine when to hunt for causes of variation and take action te correc
‘them and when to leave the process alone,istical Quality Control (S.0.C) : mim
. Itenables to take decisions regarding acceptance or rejection of manufactured or
purchased product.
4 Whelps to ensure product quality level,
7. Control charts in genera! built up the reputation.
3. X & R chart provides detailed information on process average as well as variation
nitations +
1, X and R charts cam be used only for quality characterstics that can be measured and
expressed in numbers, However many quality characteristics can be observed only as
attributes. For example, while inspecting castings in addition $0 conformity to dimensions,
‘itmay be necessary to inspect other quality characterstics such as cracks, holes,swells,
hard sport etc. which singly or in combination may make the castings defective.
2. & and B chartscan be used only for one individual characteristic at a time. (for each
quality chatacterstic seperate X and R charts are needed.) -
3. Itinvolves more cost and time for measuring, computing and plotting the charts,
‘Therefore, for the sake of economy Kand R charts are plotted only for the most important
and troublesome quality characteristics,
2.23. Compare Xané R chart with P chart.
1. Pchartiis an attribute control chart, ic. for quality cheracteristics that can be classified
as either conforming or non-contorming to the specifiactions. For examples, dimensions =
checked by GO, NO-GO gagues,
characterstics that can be measured and expressed in numbers,
2 The cost of computing and charting inay also be less since Pchart can be applied to
2, Say number of quality characterstics observed in article...
‘But seperate “XK and R charts are rquited for each measured quality cheractorstie
‘which may be impracticable and uneconomical:
3. The cost of collecting the data on p chart is also less than the cost of gallecting the data,
for Rand R char for example, 10 or even more shatls migh{ be inspected with go-no-
80 gauges in the time roquired to measure a single shaft diameter with a micrometer,
Secondly P chart uses data already collected for other purposes,
4 P chart is best suited in eases as here inspection i earried aut with a view to classfying
an articlo as acceptable or rejectablo,
Rend R charts are best suited for critical examination,
5.. P chart though discloses the presence of assignable cause of varietion, it is not as
sensitive as X ond R chart.
& ‘The sample size is generally larger for P chart than for Rand R chart. The variations
in the smaple size influences the control limits much more in Xand R charts than in P
chart,PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS
14,8. Control chatrs for x and R are maintained on the tensile strength for cei
yarn. The subgroup size is 5. The values of X_ and R are computed for eaf
subgroups,after 25 sub groups,
Solutions EX = 514.8 and ER~= 120 compute the values of 3 sigmalimits for Rand R chal
and estimate the value of on the assumption that the process is in statistical control.
‘Take, dg = 2326, D, = 4.92, D, = 0
io SL EX _ S48
Now, X= =X ~ SMS La.
low, X= se 7 20.592
UGE = X+30X
= 20,592 + 2.748 = 23,376
LCLX = K-35X
= 20,592 - 2.748
= 17.808
For R chart
Central line R = 4.80
“ULER = Die!
= 4.92 x 2.0636 = 10.128
LCER = Dio’
=0x6
= O (Note that D) = Oupton = 5)‘Statistical Quality Control ( ae
14.9. In an automatic filling, 175 gms of certain chemical is to be packed In certain
container. The permissible variation is + 5 gms. To investigate the capacity of
@ process, samples of § each [Link] from 10 successive batches, and data
were recorded as given below. .
Batch I 2. 3 4 $ 6 7 "8 9 10
Mean'X 7 YT 176 176.174 11S) (176176 4
RengsR 3 5 3 8 2 8 5S 7 3° 2
Assuming the process to be within control,establish the capability of the process and compare
itwith the stipulated specifications.
‘Solution : -
Fora sample size of 5, d; = = = 2326
Kw ATA NTT + 176 + 196 + 174 + 177 + 195 + 176 +176 + 174
10
= 1758
Kae TRL BHSHIFS HIDES HS S47 4342
10
CSC CHAKRAVARTHI
Assistant Manager - QAQC
BRL Gyr pe asi tees do Tee
UCLE = Xx + 30K = 175.8 + 3 x 0.8844 ~-178.4533
VEER = Be daX © 615.843 x 08864 ~ 173.1467
Process capability - = 6= 6% 19776 = 11.8656
qT ‘Now specified tolerance
eae won = Bmax -Xmin) = 10
pei] Net een) In this case (Ximax -“Xmin) <6 9"
Ty ‘Therefore, defective products will always
be there.
Fig. 14.1514,10, The following are the X and R values of 4 subgroups of § readings X= 10,
12.1, 10.8 and 10.5 R = 1.1, 1.3, 0.9 and 0.8, -
‘The specification limits for the components are 10.7 40.2
Establish he control limits Sor X and R chart, wil the products ableto mee is specifcati
Given :
1. Aq (factor for K Chart) = 0.58
2 Dg (factor for R chart) =2.11 >
3. D3 (factor for chart) = 0.00
Solution
x. 2%
TN
= 202 + 12.1 + 10.8. + 10.5)
4
X= 109
xe ZR och +13 +094 08
N 4 .
= 1.025
UCLXSX+A2R
= 10.9 + 0.58 x 1.025
Lams
= me
= 10.9 - 0.58 x 1.025
= 9.3055
‘The upper specification limit= 10.7 + 0.2 = 10.90
Lower specification limit = 10.7-0.2= 10.50
Since the lower control limit is tess than the lower specification fimit some defective p
will be produced, the process is not able to meet the specifications.
» LOLX
__ T4114 subgroup ofS tems each are taken fram a manufacturing process at aregul
interyal. A certaia quality characteretle ig measured and X and R valu
computed after 25 subgroups it is found that E x= 397.50 and DR = 3.8
If the specfication limits are 14,40 + 0,40 and if the process is in statisti
control what concluslon can you draw about the ability of the process ta prod’
items withla specification?
(for subgroup of S items dy = 2,326)UCLE = X43 ox = 14300 +3 x 0.67678 = 14,5030
LOLX = X-3 o® = 14300 - 3. 0.057678 = 14.0970
Now, Xmex = 1440 + 0.40 = 14.80
Xmin = 14.40 - 0.40 = 14,00
«+ Ximax - Xmin = 0.80
Process capability 6.0" = 6 x 0.15133
= 090758
Conclusion : In this case (Xmax= Xmin) <6"
ent Therefore defective parts will always be there,
TT Suggested remedy will be :
svc resent 1. Increase the tolerance ft does not affect the functioning
seer ofthe product: :
| | | 2, Reduce dispersion
4 si "3, Suffer and sort out the defectives.
Fig. 14.16, . . .
14.12, Control charts for X is to be prepared for a certain dimension of component.
‘The subgroup sizeis 4 After 20 subgroup it is found that [ X= 825.60 mm and
ER = 5.60mm. Compute the central line and the control limits for X chart.
Take D2 = 2.059.
If the specifications are 41.0 4 0.40mm and the process is in control and is
normally distributed, can it meet the specfication requirement?
Solution : ot
zr =X 825.60
*e NS 2
Central line = 41.28 mm
ER 5.60
= 41.28iN oe
BoTork Penni
jog= 20, = 3x01359
oe
= 0.2038
UCLE = X+3 0%
= 14.28 + 0.2038 = 41.4838
LCLE = 14.28 - 0.2038 ©
= 41.0762
30? = 3x 0.1359
= 0.4077 mm
‘Now, Xmix = 41 + 040 = 41.40mm
Xmin = 41.040 . = 40.60mm
“The centring of the process 1s 41.28. Therefore, for this process the dimensions
vary form 41.28 - 0.4047 = 40.8723 mmto
40.28 + 0.4047 = 41.6877 mm.
The process capability =6.o' = 6x 0.1359 =0.8154
In this case,( Xmax - Xmin) < 6q° Therefore, defecti
parts will always be there, morever centering is not
done, ifthe centering is done properly thenumber of defes
parts can be considerably reduced.
Fig.14.17
14,13, The design specifications for a component are 100 0.5 mm where the proces
report shows that process average is 99.9 mm and standard deviation is 0.1!
Do these figures call for. any action by any one?
Solution : Upper specification limit,Xmax
=100+0.3
= 100.5 mmLowerspecification timitXmin = 100-0,5
: = 99.5 mm.
HK =99Gand ot = 0.18 (given)
‘Now (Xmax - Xmin )
= 100.5-99.5
= 1mm
Jo" = 3x 0.18
= 0,54&6q' =1,08
For this process the dimensions can vary from.
99.90 -0.54 = 99.36mmio,
99,90 + 0.54. = 100.44mm
2 . In this case (Xmax - Xmin)< @”
= ‘ses Defective products will always be there. It is therfore,
[" necessary fo take action to reduce the number of defectives
produced. There isa little difference between the specification
limits and the process capability,hence it is suggested that
the tolerance should be made slightly wider. The disign
cmin engineering is authorised to modify the especifications. At
the same time from the above figureitié clear thatthe centring
Fig.14.13, should be properly maintained by the process planner.
14.14, The following are the inspection results of 20 [Link] magnets [Link] having
780 magnets. Number of defective magnets in each lot are 48, 83, 70, 85, 45,
56, 48, 67, 37, 52, 47, $7, 71, 53, 34, 29 and 30,
Calculate the average fraction defective and three sigma controt limits for p
chart. -
Solution :
Averagp fraction defective =
‘Total number of defectives.
“Total number inspocted,
_ SBH ES 704854454564 48-467 437452447 + 504474574 S14 T14S3434 429 +30
750 x20
= 0.07067
pCi -P)
7
= 0.07067 + 0.000262
. = 0.07083
UCLP = 0.07067 - 0.000262
= 0.07041
UCL = B+Metrology & Quality
14.15,A manufacturer purchases small bolts in cartons that usually contain se
of bolts appear to exhibit statistical control with respect to the qua
characterstic examined in this inspection,
! et thousand bolts, Each shipment consists of number of cartons,as a part off
4 — acceptance preedure for these bolts,400 bolts are selectd at random form
carton and are subjected to visual inspection for certain defects. {n a shipr
of 10 cartons the respective percentages of defectives in the samples fq
5 on each carton are 0, 0, 0, 5, 0.75, 0; 2, 0.25, 0, 0, 25, and 1.25, Does the ship:
Total number of defective articles
Total number of articles inspected.
(0404054075 4042 +0,25+0+0.25+1.25)
400
400 x10
0.015580
UCLP = 5
B Fak renoa\
= 0005-3
=~ 0.00558 0 (Since it is ss caingtes to have LCLP at - 0.00558)
Ater comparing the readings with UCLP and LCLP it is found that reading number 6:
statistical control.
14.16.1n a factory producing spark phigs the number of defectives found
of 20 lots of 100 each, is given below :
TLotNo [Link] ~~ Lotno [Link] Lot No
defectives defectives “defectivesStatistical Quality Control (
construct appropriate céntro{ chart arid state whether the process is under control.
Solution : .
“Average fiaetion defective p = ott number of defective
‘Total number of inspected,
120
20x10
vc = p43 fP-F)
30.061 - 0.06)
100
= 0.06 + 30.037) = 0.1311
UCLP = 0.06 -3(0.0237) = + 0.011 = O(say)
= 0.06
= 0.006 +3
Fig.14.19 p chart
(Since fraction defective can not be negative for constructing the chart the data may be tabulated
as follows:
[-TorRe: Fraction ___LotNo Fraction Lot No Fraction
1 0.05 8 0.03 16 004
2 0.10 9 0.03 y 0.05
3 0.12 10 0.05 8 0.08
4 0.08 rn 0.04 19 0.06
5 0.06 n 0.07 2» 0.10
6 0.04 134 0.08
7 0.06 4 0.02
15 0.03
(4,17. The following table shows the number of defects observed in 25 similar castings,
Casting Noof Casting Noof Casing. Noo
No defects No defects No _ defects
1 7 10 2 » 10
2 4 u 2 2 8
3 4 ar iS 2 9
4 38 B 8 2 ou
3 g “ A B 7
6 4 as “ a %
7 8 16 9 25 8
g u W 9
9 2» 18 ni Findc
i, Compute trial control fimits.
fi What value “C’ can you suggest for subsequent period eliminating observations lying
beyound control limits.
Solution :
c
prubapility >
oz 6 6% 1 1h
Fig.14.23 Comparison of Oc. __Fig.14.24 percent Defective (100p)
curve for four sampling plan.
3. With a fixed value of N and C arn, larger the value off, the better is the discrimination
between good lots and bad lots.
4, With a fixed value of acceptance number and n a.N the larger then, the steeper the
slope of 0.C. curve and better ability to discriminate between good lots and bad lots.
5. The larger the sample size and acceptance number the steeper the slope of OC curvel
fig.14.24 shows that the larger sample size which protects the consumer against
the acceptance of relatively bad lots aiso gives better protection to the producer
against rejection of relatively good lots. .
Q.31. Differentiate between Accceptance/Rejection and Acceptance/Rectitication|
scheme,
‘Ans + Acceptamee /Rejection scheme : In this scheme of acceptance sampling, The lots
are subjected to sampling inspection. Ifthe lot contains more than “C” defectives itis rejected;
otherwise itis accepted. The Average Outgoing Qulity will be equal to or more than the given|
fraction defectives. In acceptance rejection scheme O.C. curves used to discriminate between
‘good lots and bad lots,
~Acceptance/Rectification schemes are specially appropriate where lots are produced in|
Streams asin mass production: The lots are subjected to sampling inspection and if it contains
“C’ defectives are less then it is accepted. If the lot contains more than C defectives7B Quality Contral
hows the ability 0
curves for different
bsolute size of the
ize of the lot,
BP ts
yr
ve (100p)
1e discrimination:
» the steeper the:
ts and bad lots. |
spe of OC curve’
sumer against
he producer
(Rectitication
pling. The lots
‘esitis rejected
=than the given
ninate between
‘e produced in
\d i€it contain
lefectives iti
{Statistical Quality Control (S.0.C)
subjected to 100% inspection and defective erticles are either replaced or corrected (rectified)
before it is passed forward.
So, for a given fraction defectives, the lot accepted as a result of first sampling inspection
will have a fraction defective P’ the rejected lots are subjected to 100% inspection and defective
amticles are replaced or corrected therefore, the AOQ will be less than P”
f
AQ = Pa?” =)
Where = Probability of acceptance
P = fraction defective.
N = Lotsize
n = Sample size
Ifthe sample size is much Jess as compared to lot size then AOQ =pa,
For acceptance rectification scheme the curvé of AOQ plotied against P" is used.
[Link] the interests of the consumer and producer in the selection of
sampling plans.
‘Ans : Since, the ideal sampling plan which will satisfy both the consumer and producer is not
possible, some compromise has to be made and they have to tolerate certain risk.
At first imperession, it appears that the producer and consumer have completely opposite
viewpoints towards the selection of sampling plans([Link] interests are conflicting). But
more critical consideration will show that there is a continuing relationship between the
producer and the consumer.
Substantial rejection of good products in the effort to exclude bad products is not necessarily
{in the interest of consumer. The consumer is interesed in quality, he is also interested in cost.
Inthe fong run the costs incident to the rejection of good products tend to be passed on by the
producer to the:consumer. Secondly, any good product that he [Link] not available for his
immediate use: .
‘Therefore, the:prodtcer-and consumer should select acceptance plan which will satisfy
doth of them and they must be ready to tolerate certain risk.
0.33, Expiain single-sampling [Link] double sampling plan with respect to their
respective acceptancescriteria:
Ans . Single samlingyplan: Whea the decision on acceptance or rejection of the lot is made
on the basis of only one:samp}e: The sampling ptan is called as single sampling plan,
Ina single sampling plan there are three parameters:
N = Lot size from which the samples are drawn,vii
Tack fee
Mesh
Re
7g “Metrology & Quality Control
n= Sample size
CC = acceptance number (i.e. maximum number of allowable defectives)
If the sampling plan is, N = 50
n=6
c=2
Tt means take a sample of 6 items from a lot of $0, if the sample contains more than 2
defectives reject the lot otherwise accept the lot,
“The single sampling plan can be represented diagrametically as follows:
Parameters : N Inspect a sample of n items
son
Tfnumber of defectives
©
Dots not execeed “C’ Exceeds “C
Accept the lot Reject the lot
Single Sampling plan
Double sampling plan : In a double sampling plan the decision on acceptance or rejection of
the lot is based on two samples. The lot may be accepted at once if the first sample is good
‘enough or rejected at once if the first sample is bad enough. If the first sample is neither good
‘enough nor bad enough, the decision on acceptance or rejection is based on the basis of first
and second saniple combined.
Parameters ; n,= number articles in the sample.
{c,= acceptnce number for the first sample i.e. maximum number of
defectives that will permit the acceptance of the lot on the basis of the
first sample.
n,= number of articles in the second sample,
n, +h, = number of articles in the two samples combined,
C,= acceptance number for the first and second sample combined,ology & Quality Control
tives)
je contains more than 2
Hows :
1
Exceeds “C
Statistical Quality Controt ([Link] . 16
Inspect n, pieces
= L
Af the number of defectives
~ Does not execeed ©,
“Accept the lot “Take second sample Reject the lot
ofn2 pieces
[Link] defectives in the first
and second sample combined
ie in (a, +n.)
‘Dose not excet
J
Reject the lot
L
‘Accept the lor_
Reject thetor
Double Sampling plan
0.34. Describe briefly Maltipfe Sampling plan,
‘ptance ot rejection of f
2 first sample is good |
amples neither good
don the basis of first
ximum number of 3
ton the basis of the
combined.
[Multiple sampling plan : The phrase multiple sampling is used when three or mére samples
of astated size are permitted and when the decision on accepince os rejection must be reached.
afler stated number of samples,
A nnultiple sampling procedure ean be represented in a tabular form as follows :
Sample Sample combined samples
No. Size Size "Acceptance ——-Rejection
First 7 a, C h
Second’ n, ata, c, ty
‘Third a ntata, cG. 5
Forth a atatatn, c 5
Fifth a nyt r,t ata tn, c 5
A first sample ofn, is drawn: The lot is accepted if thefe are no more than C, defectives,
the lot is rejected if there are more than r, defectives otherwise a second sample of n, is
Jéravn, The lotis accepted if there are no more than C, defectives in the combined sample oftn, The procedure is contintied in accordance with the above table depending on the numb
of samples.
“Multiple sampling plan gives better protection to doubtful! lots. But they usually requii
higher adminstrative costs and higher caliber inspection personnel mey be necessary
guarantee proper use of the plans. secondly the indecision is continued for a longer period.
Q.35, Compare Single, Double and Multiple sampling plans,
Feature Single Double Multiple
. ‘sampling ‘samplig sampling,
plan plan plan
1, Average number of Generally In between, Lowest
pieces inspected perlot Largest single and
‘ rmouttipte plans
2. Acceptability to producer Psychologically. Mostacceptable Less acceptable
poor,itgives (Gives asecond) _sinceindecision
only one chance chance to is continued for a
of passing the “doubtful lots longer period,
lot (Risk of
good lots being
rejected)
[Link] Administration Lowest In between, Largest
single and
multiple .
4. Information available Largest In between Least
about prevailing quality single and
level multiple
‘Compared with regards to all the four aspects double sampling plan is best. Where the cod
of inspection is high, We choose multiple sampling plans, If the decision is taken on sing!
sampling plan the lot has not to wait, bu in multiple sample plan the indecision is continued fo
along period and lot has to wait, therefore more storage space is necessary to store the item
until the decision is taken,I may be necessary
d fora longer period,
Less acceptable
sinceindecision |
is continued for a
longer period. |
Largest
sion is taken on singlf
cisions continued fo
ssary to store the it
Statistical Quality Control
Q.36 Explain the term product reliability ? How it is calculated ?
‘Ans. A productis an assembly of a number of parts or components, The components may”
be connected similar or dissimilar. The components may be connected in series or in parallel,
of it may be 2 mixed system, where the components are connected in series as well 2s
arallel,
Pr]. Components connected in series: I'the components fan assembly ere connected
in series the failure of any part causes the failure of the asembly or a systern.
Inthis type of system the relisility of the assembly is given by the product of the reliabilities
of the individual components. .
Suppose a system (product) consists of three mechanical devices, A, B and C that operate
in series in such a way that a feilure in any one device casues a failure in the system.
Assume that, the prabibility that A will operate without failure for 100 hours is estimated
to be 0.45 and that of B and C are 0.90 and 0.80, respectively. If the failures in A, B, and
Care completely independent the probbility that the system will operate without failure for
100 hours should be estimated to be
(0.95) x (0.90) x (0.80) = 0.684
Therfore, in general, ifthe system consists of n parts,
© @ ®
Component:
series
Reliaibility ofthe system,
xRO-
2. Components connected in parallel : When the components are connected in parallel,
Rs. = R(t) x RW) «RO x
let
oe ® ©
Components in parallel
ere.rary : Metrology & Quatity Control
4g, = probability of failure of the i* component Q.371
p,=1-g,= probability of successful operation
‘Then, probability of failure of the system is given by
‘Ans. i
FQ)=q, xg, x Gx oe betwee
canbe
Reliability of the system, does n:
the foll
R= 1-£9 .
a-r)
=1-(-P) (1-P) (-P)
3. Mixed System: Figure shows two devices A and B connected in series. Device A
consists of two pats | and connected in parallel, Smilin, device Boonsists of vo pars
3 and 4 connected in parallel.
A
‘The Reliability ofthe device A,
R,@= 1-(-P) (1-P)
The reliability of the device B,
RQ =1 -(1-B,) (1-P)
And the reliability of the system
RM=RO «RO
i.e. System (Product) Reliability
{1-(-P)CL-P)] [1-(1-P) C1-PD]Sieology & Quality Control
2eted in series. Device A
ce Beonsists of two parts,
Statistical Quality Control ($.Q.C)
Q.37 Explain the terms :
i)MTBF ii) MTTR
in connected with reliability.
Ans. i) MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) : MTBF is the mean (or average) time
between successive failures of the product. This definition assumes that the: product in question
can be repaired and placed back in operation after each failure. An increase in an MTBF
does not result in proportional increase in reliability (the probability of survival). ft =1 hour,
the following table shows the mean time between failures required in order to obtain various
reliabilities.
MTBF R
5 0.82
10 0.90
20 0.95
100 0.99
MTBF is often used as the criterian for making iniportant decisions affecting reliability.
ii) MTTR : Mean [Link] Repair : It is the arithmetic mean of the time required to
perform maintenance action.
‘Total maintenance time
‘Number of maintenance action
Maintenance action rate (j:): Itis the numerical value representing the number of
maintenance action that can be carried out on a particular equipment per hour,
oot
** MIR.
Mathematically, Mean time to repair
=n, A, tm
rrr = 2A
Eni hi
where, amber of similar parts
failure rate
imi= predicted maintenance action timeWa “Motrology & Quality Control
EXERCISE
1, Anindustry produces springs of certain quality. The results of inspection of one of
critical dimensions (length) is given in the following table. What interpretations can
be derived regarding.
1. As central tendency (process average)
2: Dispresion,
3. Suitability of the process
Dimension Frequency
097 2
0.98 2
099 M4
1:00 2»
101 a
1.02 18
1.02 “18
4.03 10
‘104 6
‘1.05, 3
2. Following are the readings of 50 bars in a sample.
Cell intervals. Frequency
‘Class limits
2530-2531 2
25,32-25.33 8
25.34.2535, i
25.36-2537 is
25,38-25.39 6
25.40-25.41 1 :
4, Draw the frequency polygon and frequancy histogram.
by Find the Arithmatic mean and standard deviation,
3. Compute the averge and the standard deviation of the followings distribution which
shows the resuit of distribution of he resistuace of 500 units of certain electrical product
Resistance Frequency Resistance Frequency
27-29 2 42-44 n3
3,003.2 % 45-47 a
33-35 48 4.8-5.0 2
“3.904:1 188 5.15.3 4
344 138 :cology & Quality Ganteol
‘of inspection of one of
‘That interpretations can
ngs distribution which
wwigin electrical product.
Frequency
U3
n
2
4
Caleulats
data as follows,
Measurement
25.70
25.60
2580
25.40
2530
25.20
process capabili
ornot.
shafis are as given below.
Ast day 2nd day
23.80 2378
23.77 23.16
23.79 23.78
23.75 23.79
2378 23:40
xR
”
i
ti
tt
AL
. Control charts for X and R are maintain
Subgroup size is 4; the values of
subgroups "X = 43.275,
2.150 + 0.020. Ifthe dimension fall
below the specification limit, the
‘Statistical Quality Control (50.6.
2 A. Arithmetic mean
B. Standard diviation
4, Youhave collected the following data from mi
selected from a large lot of machine
icrometer measurementsin miflimeters of asample
ty parts and have formed a frequency tally sheet of the
Compute the average and standard devistion of the sem
0.5 mum interpreat the resuls 6n the basis of normal distribution.
5. Determine the control limits for & and R charts if YX ~375.50, SR =9.90 Number
of subgroups = 20. Ifis given that A, =0.28, D,=0/4l andD, = 1.59/d,=3.735, Also find
6 Comtrol chart for % and R are maintained on acertain
meausred in mm. the sub group size is 4. The value
subgroup. Afier 20 subgroups )"X
sigma limits for the % and R charts and estimate the value
process is in statistical control.
7. Inacapability study of atathe used in tu
sample of 5 consecutive pieces was tak
=412.83 and ’R
3rd day
23.78
23.76
2377
23.73
23.75
Construct 5% and R chart. State whether the machin
’Measurement,
25.10
25.00
24.90"
24.80
24.70
4th day
B13
23.70
Bn
23.74
23,76
‘Tally
tt
=
Wt
'
!
Imning a shaft to a diameter of 23.75 + 0.10 mma
‘en each day for five days. The diameters of these
Sthiday
23.76
2377
2374
Bn
23.79
¢ is capable of meeting the tolerarice
fed on the outside diameter of a bearing. The
X& and R are computed for each subgroup, After 20
0.286, The dimension specific:
above the spetification limit rework is required; if
bearing must be rejected,
of the producis
iples Given a specification of 25 4
dimensions of a manufactured part,
of X and R are computed for each
=3.39 Compute the values of 3
of @ onthe assumption that the‘Maraloay & Quality Contral
If the process is in statistical control and normally distributed, what can you conclude
regarding the ability to meet the specifications? can you make any suggestions? ]
9, The following table shows the averages and ranges of the spindle diameters in mms, for 20
subgroups of 5 items each For the first 10 samples set up an X chart and R chart to seelf
if the proces continues under control both as to average and range, Also find procest
capability. q
(42=2.326)
2X OX R x. R 4 R
45.020 0375 45.660 (0475 45.26 0.150
45,950 0450 «45.680 «0275 45.650 0.200
. 45.480... 0450 45,600" 0275 «45.620 0.400
“45.320. 0.150 45,020 0.175 45.480 0.225
45.280 0200 45.320 0.200 45.380 0.25
45.580 0250°> 43.560. 0.425”. 45.660 0350
45.490 0475 45.140 0.250 = —
Loan
5.
10, The following data gives the number of missing rivets noted at arieraft final inspection.
air Nowf * aie [Link] Air
Plane ~~ missing plane missing
No No rivets
10
1
a2
B
4
Is
16
wm
18
i
&
i
.
I Fiid G
11. Compute control limits
TH. Plot control chart.
11. The following are the inspection results fo 20 lots of magnets each lot being of 750 magne!
‘Number of defective magnets in each lot are? ]Tor Quay Comal]f [Satna Gap Conrad SOC)
what can youconcludef 48 55 477
suggestions? BSB &£ 9 8
ametersinmms,for20f 0 9 7? 47,34
tartandRclarttosesf 8 © 37 S57 | 29
ge. Alsofind proces]! «45 SZ SLO :
Calculate the average fraction defective and three sigma control limits for P chart and |
‘state whether the process is in control.
12, An inspection results of 10 typical samples, for esiablishing P chart are:
R
0150 Sample No 1°23 4 $ 6 7 8 9. 0
0200 Noofdefective 10 122 8 9 2 8 WH 9 B
‘0.400 [Link] 90 110 9 100 130 100 8 110 10 9%
0.225
0125 Computer trial controt limits, plot P chart and establish the value of p and control limits for
0350 future production,
_ —— - } [Link] table refers to the average number of outlet leaks per radiator for 10 lots of 100
radiators each,
raft finial inspection. Lot [Link] Leaks per Lot [Link] Leaks per :
Air Nowof No. © radiator No leaks radiator - :
Jane ‘missing c c i
No’ rivets~ Ust © vet
pon 1 1s 015 6 5 0.05 . |
2. 2 2 7 O17 7 ro 0.14,
a 10 3 2 » O12 8 u on
2 2 4 16 0.16 9 9 0.09 i
5 14 014 10 10 0.10 1
1, Compute control limits for U chart. i,
Il. Establish 77, forfuhire production. i
B 7
aw B
Bs 9
ot being o£ 750 m:Rex 0.99
Si
o.o00r?
e.00024
0.00085
o.n0080
o.0071
6.00300
014
Proportion of total area under
Curve from
0.08.
9.00017
o.09028
‘0.00036,
“o.00082
0.00078
9.0104,
0014
oor
0015
0.05
0.00039 °0:00020,
0.00028 0.00029
0.00040 0,00042
90058 ~0.00060
0.99082 0.00085
oo0t4 0.00118
o.0018 av0ig
‘v.00 0.0028
‘edos0 6.0081
0040 0.0061
0.0054 9.0055
gor. 0.0073
0.0094
90122
oie ~ 0.0162
0202 0.0207
ors ~ ‘010262
0322 0.10329
0401 9.00409
0.0495 0.605
[Link] 0.0818
073s “0.0749
0.0885 0,001,
0.1057 0.1075
ozs. 0.1271
1469, 0.1492
erat 01786
Gist? _ 0.2005
02264. 0.2207
0.2846. 0.2611
o2e1z 0.2046
onze 08800
sez 0.8669
oseiz 0.3669
doe 0.4443
agar. 0.4840
wal.
> where is the standard deviation of the universe.
0.90126
‘osor7
o.002
‘008s
9044
0.0069
00078
poe
ons
arto
0.0217
nga7e
34
ose
0.0528
oes
ors
onese
oan
oasis
0.4588
0.1788
2061
0.2058
0.2676
ONT
03745
oanaa
oaaan
‘9.00097
0.90185
0.0019
0.908
0.0047
0.9062
eons
am07
9.0139,
our
oun
a287
0359
vous
9.0548
ones.
‘osnn0
i
1Sacer.
ar
i
a er B
001
‘[Link]
oss
0.5682
os217
oss01
0.8950
omar
7611
ora
pats
esse
9.8686
0.8869
9049
0.927
9.9385
0.9488
0.9864
geo
axne
are
6.9826
[Link]
0.9896
0.9920
o.9940
v.995s
o's965
0.0975,
0.9082
9.99800
0.99908
[Link]
Sigaws
[Link]
‘002
0.8080
sara
asst
e255,
[Link]
0.6985,
07924
e762
‘07988
vgn
ote,
0.3686
gees
9686
0.9733
0.9850
o.9a6a
0.9898
0.90%
0.9941
9968
0.9967
ooire
0.9983
oer
o.s9et0
099996
L958
omages
0.03)
osiz0
asst
oseio
0.6295
bese
7019
os?
mses
97967
0.8288
oss
0.8708
0.8907
0.9082,
come
0.9870
0.9404
0.9582
0.9064
0.99967
99970
TABLE A
Areas Undor the Nornial Curve- (Continued)
ae
osi6o
‘sss
‘asosa
0.653%
0.8700
0.7058
0.7388
or704
0.7995
0.8284
0.8508
oat
[Link]
0.9090
0.9281
0.9982
0.9495
‘o.9504
ogent
ogias
e.s798
oars
0.9904
0.9927
0.9948
0.9959
0.9969
[Link]?
o.9984
9.99882,
0.99985,
o.s9980
o.99988
agonn
093
ose
oss96
oiseat
0.8958
a.6136
e.7088
raze
ortea
og023
289
9.388}
oa74a
oases
eons
o9a6s
oose4
0.9508
0.9509
0.9678
oor
0.9798
oer
0.9878
0.9908
0.9929
0.9946
0.9960
0.9976,
0.0978
0.9984
0.99889
6.98038
o94e
9.99960
e997
‘ons,
vsee
aset6
o.s026
o.g406
ogi
ons
0.7454
ose
9.8081
oats
0.9971
0.0579
0.9985
[Link]
[Link]
og9948
99961
asosta
fd
sare
5675,
5084
5493,
6808
onst
927480
0.7398
079
asa
ost
0.3700
0.8990
0917
0.9392
ons
0.9828
0.9616
9.9603
og786
0.9808
09850
baaas
gon
v.9982
0.9949
9.9962
gore
0.9979
0.9985
0.99693
0.99824
osye46
e996
90974
008
assis
smi
osiso
0.5480
0.6346
0.7190
osut
01828
0.8106
0.3865
0.2599
oaa1o
osser
omen
9.9306
0.9420,
9685,
0.9635,
e989
os7e
09812
0.9889
9.9887
oss19
vase
0.998%
v.9es
osv7a
0.9080
0.9988
o.99K98
99026
n9yges
v'vages
ayers,Metroloay & Quality Control
> osne
osm
0.5190
0.6430
esas
07190
7517
o.7e23
e.8105
o.as65
0.8605
0.8810
‘0.3907
one
o2ane
9.9429
9.9598
0.9825,
oseug
ove.
09812
0.9888
0.9887
oser3,
09934
ogant
0.9968
9.9978
0.9980
0.9986
ov9a96
osg926
9904s
o'vs964
ogaer
os388
oss
ota
06517
e.8a79
ora¢
0.7540
0.7852
oansa
o.as99
oss
o.sa0
880
ostiz
o2s10
ose
09545,
n.96e3
osT05
oste7
0.9817
ogast
0.9800
0.9918
0.9886
o.se52
0.9964
Soars
0.9981
9.9986
9.89900
0.99929
9.99960
99955
o.g0076
TABLEB
Factors Bstimating 6° from ROor 6
Tosti of | Pretne for | —Faior fr
Cinervations| Estimate estimate
ine eeu] fom
2 éptio® eecle!
2 Tee ORG
8 1.603 07238
+ 0.059 or
5 226, 08607
6 asst 0.608
1 2.704 ose
a zee soz
° 2970 9189
10 2078 ost
un aa7s e800
2 3.258 suse
18 3.az0 oo
« 3.407 ose
. 18 347 o.4a0
16 3.592 osszs
” 2.588 gaa
18 3.860 oaste
19 2.639 [Link]
20 2748 ovis
a are 0.9638
2 san 0.2685
23 858 03670
4 oss oot .
2% S891 09698
20 4.088 osts
3 421s oor
ro 4992 0.9811
“6 ans gas
wo 4.498 ous
88 4573 ose
60 4439 ose
6 4.699 oge4
0 4755, ogawe”
% su
a0 9.908
86 4498 ascig
20 4.999 ossie
96 4978 ose
100 ons oees
Estimate of °=Rd, or o /C,
‘These factors assume sampling from a normal universeTable
Factors for Determining from R the 3-Sigms control.
Limits for Xand B Charts from R
Number of | Factor for| Factor for R chart
observations | X Chart [Lower control upper control
Ay
Upper Cantrol limit forX = UCL ¢=X+A,R
Lower eontrol limit for X = LOL g=X-A,R
Uf aimed or standard value X is used rather than X as the central
line on tho control chart, X should be substiuted for X in the preceding formulas.)
Upper Control Limit for R = UCL, = DR
Lower Control Limit forR = LCL, = Dj
[All factors in Table C are based on the normal distribution.Metrology & Quatity Control ~
TABLE D
ontrol. Factors for Determining from the $ sigma Control Limits for Xando_Charts
‘omber of | Ractor for
observations | X Chart | Lower control | upper eoatrl
limit | mie
a a |B.
2 on
5 st
‘ 267
3 209
6 ust
: 138
& 1.38
2 ize
rt in
0 168
12 16
a 2
1% 189
15 167
16 15
1 133
8 1s
1» 180
2 18
a 1a
2 ke
23 146
2 tas
2 tas
30 140
35 : ist
Ps re,
Ps 132
on) 180
55 ae
*% 138
6 12
70 136
1s 135
40 124
85 om | 13
: 0 om | im
z 95 078 19205
200 ory | at
Kast Upper control limit fork = UCLZ=X+Ao
Kas the central ~ os
bent formulas) Lower control limit fork = LOLX= $- Avo
Upper Control limit foro
Lower Control Limit fora = LCL = Bo”
All facto in ‘Tuble D are based on the norma’distribution
(If aimed or standard value X is used rather than as ¥ the central line on the
chart, ¥ should be subsitued for Xin the preeding formulas.)
=UCL = BS. TABLE -E j
Eactors for Determining from the 3 sigma Control Limits for X/R ando Charts
7 ‘Number of Factor for| Factor for R chart, Factor for R chart
ahsorentions |X Chart | Tawar PRE
Emit
Dd D,
369
436
ons
os
ast
042
039
36
034
032
030
UCLg=X+A LOL = X- Ae L 7
(Crwitard} avorage is to bo used rather than standard or aimed at a average, X should be
satibstituedifor X in thé preceding formula)
UCL, = D,
Conteal ence = cat
LCLe= Dye
‘UCLe = Bye
Contral lines